JP6376083B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the special gaming state is entered, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-mentioned example, it is necessary to suitably advance the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that a special ball entry part into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the game ball entering the special ball entry section;
Predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means;
A game times control means for controlling the game times execution means so that the game times operation is executed in response to the grant judgment being executed by the grant judgment means;
With
The game times control means includes
In the situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game turning operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information is used as an execution trigger. When the game turning operation is executed, the game turning operation is executed over a first operation period that is shorter than the shortest pitching cycle in the case where a game ball enters the special entry portion. First control means to do so;
In the case where the game rotation operation is executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation, Second control means for causing the game turning operation to be executed over a second operation period;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably advance the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special figure winning device in a non-accepting state, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special figure winning device in an accepting state. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a branch winning apparatus. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right side field. It is the side view of a 1st distribution mechanism, and the longitudinal cross-sectional view of the said 1st distribution mechanism periphery. (A)-(c) It is a front view of the rotary body for distribution. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball is induced | guided | derived by the 1st distribution mechanism and the 2nd distribution mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st special drawings, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd special drawings. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of each jackpot result. (A1)-(f1) It is a time chart which shows the winning aspect of the game ball in a 1st high probability state, (a2)-(f2) It is a time chart which shows the winning aspect of the game ball in a 2nd high probability state. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power transmission control process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a usual figure change performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal power operation performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the 1st special figure winning apparatus performed with MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the 2nd special figure winning apparatus performed with MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure change start process performed in MPU of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a usual figure change performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right side field in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right field in a 4th embodiment. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game ball is induced | guided | derived by the 1st distribution mechanism. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows the winning aspect of the game ball in high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power transmission control process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a usual figure change performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal power operation performed by MPU of a main controller. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main control apparatus, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the display continuation period performed in MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game time start process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. (A) to (c) In the high frequency support mode, the game flow is shown when the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism with the shortest firing period and the game times corresponding to the detachment result are continuous. It is a time chart. It is a front view of the game board which expands and shows the right field in a 5th embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 16 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 17 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 17 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 17a is fitted therein. The window panel 17a is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin, and the game area PA is defined through the window panel 17a from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 18 a is provided above the window unit 17. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 18b for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 17, an upper bulging portion 19 a and a lower bulging portion 19 b that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper pan opening upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 19a, and a lower pan similarly opening upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 19b. The upper plate has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. Further, the lower plate has a function of storing the game balls that become surplus in the upper plate.

  The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for feeding a game ball stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a onto the launch rail 27a, and launching. And a solenoid 27c that is an electric actuator for firing a game ball supplied on the rail 27a toward the guide rail. When the launch operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning part 31, a first special figure normal winning part 32, a first special figure winning device 33, a second special figure winning device 34, a special electric prize winning device 35, a through winning part 36, a branch winning device 37, A variable display unit 40, a special drawing unit 45, and a universal drawing display unit 46 are provided.

  Even if a ball enters the through winning portion 36, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, the general winning part 31, the first special figure normal winning part 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the special electric prize winning device 35 and the branch winning device 37 are predetermined when a winning occurs. A number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of winning balls is entered in any of the first special figure normal winning unit 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, and the branch winning device 37. In the case where three prize balls are paid out, 10 prize balls are paid out when the general winning portion 31 is entered, and the special prize winning apparatus 35 is entered. The payout of 15 prize balls is executed.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered the various prize winning units are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the game ball entering the out port 24a, the general winning part 31, the first special figure normal winning part 32, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special The winning in the figure winning device 34, the special electricity winning device 35, the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 is also expressed as winning.

  A variable display unit 40 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 40 protrudes ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 40, and a lower area than the variable display unit 40 that is continuous below the upper area PA1. A left area PA2 that is a left area, a right area PA3 that is continuous to the lower area of the upper area PA1, and is a right area of the variable display unit 40, a left area PA2, and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 that is continuous below and below the variable display unit 40.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, in the upper area PA1, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4.

  The first special figure normal winning portion 32 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first special figure normal winning part 32 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game balls from entering the first special figure normal winning part 32 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is constant without depending on the gaming state. In other words, the first special figure normal winning part 32 can always enter the game balls flowing down the game area PA toward the first special figure normal winning part 32. Further, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is arranged directly under the stage 40a formed in the variable display unit 40, and the game ball that has flowed into the stage 40a through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 40. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 40a to the outside of the variable display unit 40 are easy to win the first special figure normal winning section 32. The first special figure normal winning part 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and the detection sensor 32a detects a game ball won in the first special figure normal winning part 32.

  Here, as described above, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 is provided in the lower area PA4, but on the upstream side toward the right area PA3 with respect to the first special figure normal winning portion 32, the right side A restriction nail 24c is provided so that the game ball flowing down the area PA3 cannot reach the first special figure normal winning portion 32. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 can be won, but the right area PA3 is played. When the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the ball flows down, the first special figure normal winning section 32 cannot be awarded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flow down the right area PA3 because the regulation nail 24c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 40a is provided to the right area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first special figure normal winning portion 32 may be awarded.

  The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are installed in the right area PA3. That is, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not allowed to win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won.

  The configuration of the first special figure winning device 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a longitudinal sectional view of the first special figure winning device 33 in the non-accepting state. The configuration of the second special figure winning device 34 is the same as that of the first special figure winning device 33. In the following description, when describing each member of the second special figure winning device 34, the first special figure winning device 34 is used. The code | symbol of 33 corresponding each member is used as it is.

  The first special figure winning device 33 discharges the base unit 51 in which a discharge passage 53 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the back of the game board 24 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the game area PA. And a guidance unit 52 for guiding to the passage 53. The entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or greater than that of one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the outlet 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball won in the first special figure winning device 33.

  The guide unit 52 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, and into the discharge passage 53. Guide driving unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the game ball cannot be guided and the guiding position where the guiding can be performed (hereinafter, the guide driving unit of the first special figure winning device 33). 56 is also referred to as a first special figure winning drive unit 56a, and the second special figure winning unit 34 is also referred to as a second special figure winning drive unit 56b), and the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position. In the situation where the guide ball 55 is arranged in the blocking position and prevents the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 in the situation where the guide member 55 is arranged in the guiding position, the non-blocking does not block the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 It includes a blocking member 57 arranged in the location, the. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 is located below. A transmission unit 58 is provided so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position by a biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is first The game area PA flows downward without entering the special figure winning device 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 becomes less than one gaming ball. Thereby, in a situation where the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the first special figure winning device 33.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in the driving state, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, so that the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is not Located in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special figure winning device 33 in the guiding state.

  When the guide member 55 is disposed at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance 53a in the game area PA from below. The top surface of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the inlet 53 a of the discharge passage 53, so that the game ball received from below on the front end side of the guide member 55 is the top surface of the guide member 55. To be guided into the discharge passage 53. In addition, when the blocking member 57 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that its tip end is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. As a result, when the guide drive unit 56 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a in the game area PA enters the first special figure winning device 33.

  Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the guide driving unit 56 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 55 is arranged at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the blocking position is shown in FIG. It is referred to as a non-accepting state of the winning device 33 (or a closed state of the first special figure winning device 33, a non-guided state of the first special drawing winning device 33), and the guide driving unit 56 of the first special figure winning device 33 is driven. The state in which the guide member 55 is disposed at the guide position and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the non-blocking position is a reception state of the first special figure winning device 33 (or an open state of the first special figure winning device 33, first This is referred to as “guidance state of special figure winning device 33”. In addition, the state of the second special figure winning device 34 is a state in which the guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position. It is referred to as a non-accepting state (or a closed state of the second special figure winning device 34, a non-guided state of the second special figure winning device 34), and the guide driving unit 56 of the second special figure winning device 34 is in a driving state and a guide member. The state where 55 is arranged at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is arranged at the non-blocking position is the receiving state of the second special figure winning device 34 (or the opened state of the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device) 34 induction state).

  The first special figure winning device 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the entrance portion 53 a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, and 1 game ball passing through the front area of the entrance portion 53a simultaneously. It is provided to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 53 of the first special figure winning device 33 when the guiding unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the guiding state. In addition, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the inlet portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guidance state. On the other hand, when the guidance unit 52 of the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-guidance state, the game ball that has flowed into the passage portion 59a of the cover member 59 passes in the vertical direction without flowing into the inlet portion 53a. To do. This game ball continues to flow down the game area PA as it is.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first special figure winning device 33, and a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the second special figure winning device 34. In addition, the winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 provided in the lower area PA4. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 45 displays the change of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the winning lottery result is displayed.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 45 is provided in the lower right corner, which is an area through which a game ball does not pass in the game area PA, as shown in FIG. The special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display unit 45a and a second special figure display unit 45b. In the first special figure display section 45a, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33, thereby displaying the change of the pattern. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display unit 45b performs a variation display of the picture by performing a winning lottery based on the occurrence of winning in the second special figure winning device 34. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

  In addition, although the 1st special figure display part 45a and the 2nd special figure display part 45b are comprised by the segment indicator by which a some segment light emission part is arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as the patterns displayed on the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types of characters A configuration in which is displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 45, a first special figure hold display part 45c and a second special figure hold display part 45d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 45a and the second special figure display part 45b. . The number of game balls won in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first special figure holding display unit 45c. It has become. The number of game balls won in the second special figure winning device 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed when the second special figure reservation display section 45d is lit.

  Incidentally, the display range of the 1st special figure display part 45a is a range narrower than the display surface of the symbol display apparatus 41 mentioned later. The display range of the second special figure display unit 45 b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The display range for both the first special figure display unit 45 a and the second special figure display unit 45 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the display range of the whole of the 1st special figure display part 45a, the 2nd special figure display part 45b, the 1st special figure reservation display part 45c, and the 2nd special figure reservation display part 45d is also displayed on the symbol display device 41. The range is narrower than the surface. Thereby, the player's degree of attention to the symbol display device 41 is higher than that of the first special figure display unit 45a, the second special figure display unit 45b, the first special figure hold display unit 45c, and the second special figure hold display unit 45d. It becomes possible to raise.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the first special figure display unit 45a, a display effect is performed in accordance with that in the symbol display device 41 provided in the variable display unit 40, and in the second special figure display unit 45b. Even when the change display of the pattern is performed, the display effect is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only a display effect in accordance with the variable display in the special symbol display units 45a and 45b, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode and a display effect in the demonstration display that shift after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is started in the first special symbol display unit 45a, the effect for the game turn is started, and when the variation display of the symbol is terminated in the first special symbol display unit 45a. The effect for the game round ends. Further, in the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is started in the second special symbol display unit 45b, the effect for the game turn is started, and the variation display of the symbol is ended in the second special symbol display unit 45b. In this case, the effect for game times ends.

  The display content in the case where an effect for game times is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. And on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The stop is displayed. In addition, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right falling line L4, and a right rising line L5. Is set.

  When the symbol variation display is performed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 as an effect for game play, the variation display is started so that the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol variation display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R second-accuracy corresponding result to be described later, the same odd symbol combination is formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. . Further, when the result of the internal lottery is an 8R first high-accuracy response result, an 8R second high-accuracy response result, or a low-accuracy response result, which will be described later, the same even number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. A combination of symbols is formed.

  It should be noted that, based on winning in the first special figure normal winning unit 32, the first special figure winning device 33, or the second special figure winning device 34, in any of the special figure display units 45a and 45b and the symbol display device 41 The period from when the variable display is started until the predetermined result is displayed and the variable display is completed corresponds to one game time. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In the case where a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34, the special electric prize winning device 35 is won. Transition to the open / close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 35 is provided at a position below the first special figure normal winning portion 32 and above the out port 24a in the lower area PA4. In the lower area PA4, the special prize-winning device 35 is provided such that when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. In any case where the firing operation device 28 is being operated, the winning position is possible.

  The special electric prize winning device 35 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 35a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 35a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state by being driven by a drive unit 35b for special electricity. Specifically, the open / close door 35a is normally in a closed state in which no game ball can be won, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win in the open / close execution mode. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. The special electric prize winning device 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35c, and the detection sensor 35c detects a game ball won in the special electric prize winning device 35.

  The internal lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode is executed in response to winning in the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34 as described above. As described above, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 can be switched between a non-accepting state in which a game ball cannot be won and a receiving state in which a game ball can be won. It is a simple configuration. In this configuration, when the first special figure winning device 33 is switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state and when the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state, the game ball is placed in the branch winning device 37. Generated by winning a prize. Further, as will be described in detail later, the branch winning device 37 is provided so as to be switched between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The opportunity to switch the branch winning device 37 from the closed state to the open state occurs when a game ball wins the through winning portion 36.

  The through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 are installed in the right area PA3. That is, the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37 cannot win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the game ball flows down the right area PA3. As described above, when the firing operation device 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

  The through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and a winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated when a game ball passes through the through-hole in the vertical direction. The through winning portion 36 is provided with a detection sensor 36a, and the detection sensor 36a detects a game ball won in the through winning portion 36.

  The branch winning device 37 is switched to the open state based on winning in the through winning portion 36. Specifically, with the winning of the through winning portion 36 as a trigger, the usual display portion 46 displays a variation of the pattern. More specifically, the general diagram display unit 46 is provided at the lower right corner of the game area PA, which is a region through which game balls do not pass. The general-purpose display unit 46 includes a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the usual figure display part 46, the change display of a pattern is performed based on the winning to the through winning part 36 having occurred. And if it is the 1st high probability state or 2nd high probability state mentioned later, when the change display of a picture is complete | finished, the result corresponding to the branch winning device 37 will be in an open state is displayed. On the other hand, if it is a low probability state, an internal lottery is performed based on the occurrence of winning in the through winning portion 36, and the variable display of the pattern is started on the normal display portion 46. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a win, a result corresponding to the branch winning device 37 being opened when the display of the variation of the pattern ends is displayed, and if the result of the internal lottery is out, When the variable display ends, a result corresponding to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not in the open state is displayed.

  Note that the number of winning prizes in the through winning section 36 is not stored on hold. In other words, when winning is awarded to the through winning unit 36 in a state where the display of the variation of the pattern can be started on the general diagram display unit 46, the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the general diagram display unit 46 based on the winning. However, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs in a situation where it is not possible to start the variable display of the pattern on the normal display portion 46, the winning is invalidated, No processing is performed.

  The configuration of the branch winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 7 in addition to FIG. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the branch prize winning device 37.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the branch winning device 37 includes a branch inlet 61 that is large enough to allow a game ball to pass therethrough, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the branch inlet 61 and the game ball pass therethrough. A branch side opening / closing member 62 that switches to an open state is provided. The branch side opening / closing member 62 is opened by being driven through a link mechanism (not shown) by the branch inlet driving unit 63.

  After the game ball winning the branch entrance 61 is guided to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface of the game board 24, the game ball is passed through the branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the branch prize winning device 37 as shown in FIG. Derived. The branch passage 65 has an inlet region 65a formed so as to extend vertically downward from an inlet portion of the branch passage 65, and a downstream end of the inlet region 65a. The branch passage 65 extends in the middle of the branch passage 65. An upstream passage region 65b set to be inclined downward in the lateral direction, and a first derivation region 65c set so as to be continuous with the downstream end of the upstream passage region 65b and the passage direction is vertically downward. And a second derivation region 65d that is branched from the middle position of the first derivation region 65c, and a first derivation region that is continuous with the downstream ends of the first derivation region 65c and the second derivation region 65d. A discharge area 65e for discharging the game ball that has passed through 65c and the game ball that has passed through the second lead-out area 65d to the back side of the game board 24 is provided.

  The entrance region 65a, the upstream passage region 65b, the first lead-out region 65c, and the second lead-out region 65d all have dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction that are one game ball or more and less than two game balls. It has become. This prevents the game balls from passing through these regions 65a to 65d in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction.

  A branch winning detection sensor 66a for detecting a game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is provided at a boundary portion between the entrance region 65a and the upstream passage region 65b. The branch winning detection sensor 66a is an electromagnetic induction type sensor. When a game ball is present in the detection area, an HI level signal is output to the main controller 101 described later, and the game ball is present in the detection area. If not, a LOW level signal is output to the main controller 101 described later. The type of branch winning detection sensor 66a is arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  When the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the payout of three game balls corresponding to the number of winning balls for the winning to the branch winning device 37 is executed. Execute the process to make it. Specifically, a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is transmitted to a payout control device 107 described later. As described above, the branch winning detection sensor 66a is provided in the entrance area 65a, and when a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, a payout of the game ball corresponding to the winning to the branch winning device 37 is executed. By adopting a configuration in which the processing for performing the game is executed, it is possible to immediately pay out the game ball when a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs.

  A switching piece 67 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the first derivation area 65c to the second derivation area 65d is provided at a branch point of the first derivation area 65c to the second derivation area 65d. The switching piece 67 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the second derivation region 65d side with respect to the first derivation region 65c in the base body 64, and is entirely retracted outside the first derivation region 65c. It is possible to displace between the retracted position and the guide position protruding into the first lead-out area 65c. The switching force 67 is transmitted to the switching piece 67 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 68 is in the non-driven state, the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 68 is in the driving state. The switching piece 67 is displaced against the urging force and disposed at the guiding position.

  When the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 flows down the first lead-out area 65c without being guided to the second lead-out area 65d. Then, the game ball is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e after being detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 67 in the first lead-out area 65c. The On the other hand, when the switching piece 67 is disposed at the guidance position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 is received from below by the switching piece 67. The upper surface of the switching piece 67 in the state where it is arranged at the guide position is inclined downward toward the second lead-out region 65d. Thereby, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 67 flows into the second derivation region 65d by its own weight, and flows down the second derivation region 65d. Then, the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c provided in the second derivation area 65d and then discharged to the back side of the game board 24 through the discharge area 65e.

  The first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are electromagnetic induction type sensors, and when a game ball is present in the detection area, an HI level signal is output to the main control device 101 to be described later. When there is no game ball in the area, a LOW level signal is output to the main controller 101 described later. The types of the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are arbitrary, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  Even if main controller 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from first trigger detection sensor 66b, main controller 101 does not execute the process for paying out the game ball. Similarly, even if main controller 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball from second trigger detection sensor 66c, main controller 101 does not execute a process for paying out a game ball. On the other hand, as described above, the main control device 101 executes a process for paying out the game ball when receiving a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the branch winning detection sensor 66a. That is, when a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs, the game ball that has been won is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, so that a process for paying out the game ball is executed. After the processing is executed, the game ball is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. As a result, when the winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs, the processing for causing the game ball to be paid out is immediately executed, while the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing a passage configuration until a game ball is detected by any of the detection sensors 66c.

  When the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for setting the first special figure winning device 33 into the receiving state. Thereby, it becomes possible to win the first special figure winning device 33. Further, when the main control device 101 receives a signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball from the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the main control device 101 basically executes a process for setting the second special figure winning device 34 into the receiving state. As a result, it is possible to win the second special figure winning device 34.

  The internal space of the branch winning device 37 is formed by assembling the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 (see FIG. 3) back and forth. The transparent cover 69 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The transparent cover 69 forms a passage wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the branch passage 65. Further, the switching piece 67 exists at a position between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69. The surface of the transparent cover 69 is exposed on the front side of the game board 24 as shown in FIG. More specifically, the transparent cover 69 is provided so that the surface of the transparent cover 69 is flush with the area around the transparent cover 69 on the surface of the game board 24. That is, the surface of the transparent cover 69 constitutes a part of the game area PA. By providing the transparent cover 69 in this way, the game ball that has flowed into the branch winning device 37 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the operating position of the switching piece 67 is also visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the game ball flowing into the branch winning device 37 is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. However, since the branch inlet drive unit 63 and the switching drive unit 68 are provided on the back side of the base body 64, they cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The branch winning detection sensor 66a, the first trigger detection sensor 66b, and the second trigger detection sensor 66c are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but some or all of these detection sensors 66a to 66c are not visible. It is good also as composition which becomes.

  The branch winning device 37 is attached to the gaming board 24 from the back side of the gaming board 24, and the screw fixing position of the branch winning device 37 to the gaming board 24 exists on the back side of the gaming board 24. . Therefore, in order to remove the branch winning device 37 from the game board 24, it is necessary to perform a screw fixing releasing operation from the back side of the game board 24. Further, the screw fixing location is set so that the release operation for fixing the screw between the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 can be performed when the branch winning device 37 is removed from the game board 24. Therefore, when separating the base body 64 and the transparent cover 69 during maintenance of the branch winning device 37, it is first necessary to remove the branch winning device 37 from the back side of the game board 24. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally remove the transparent cover 69 from the base body 64.

  Next, the flow of game balls in the right area PA3 of the game area PA will be described. FIG. 8 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing the right area PA3.

  As described above, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right area PA3. The first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning unit 37 are all arranged in the middle of the right area PA3 in the vertical direction. Are arranged on the left side, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is on the center side in the horizontal direction, and the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are on the right side.

  In the right area PA3, on the upstream side of the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37, a game ball that has flowed into the right area PA3 from the upper area PA1 is passed through. A distribution unit 70 is provided for sequentially distributing to the winning portion 36 side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 side. . The distribution unit 70 includes a first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72. The configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described. FIG. 9 is a side view of the first distribution mechanism 71 and a longitudinal sectional view around the first distribution mechanism 71. The configuration of the second distribution mechanism 72 is the same as the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, and in the following description, the description of each member of the second distribution mechanism 72 corresponds to the first distribution mechanism 71. The code | symbol of each member is used as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a distribution rotator 81 for distributing game balls that have flowed in from upstream. FIG. 10A to FIG. 10C are front views of the rotator 81 for sorting. As shown in FIG. 10A to FIG. 10C, the sorting rotator 81 includes a shaft portion 82, and is located more centrally in the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 than the shaft portion 82. A ball distribution portion 83 is integrally formed so as to project outward. The ball distribution portion 83 projects outward from the shaft portion 82 over the entire axis.

  The distribution rotating body 81 is arranged such that the axial direction of the shaft portion 82 is the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 10 and is horizontal, and the shaft portion 82 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is supported so as to be rotatable about the axial direction of the portion 82. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9, the shaft portion 82 of the sorting rotator 81 is present on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 24. Part of the portion 83 located in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shaft portion 82 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 through an opening 24 d formed in the game board 24. In addition, since the distance between the part which protrudes ahead of the pachinko machine 10 in the ball distribution part 83 and the peripheral part of the opening 24d is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball flowing down the game area PA It does not get caught between the ball distribution part 83 and the peripheral part of the opening 24d.

  A portion of the ball sorting unit 83 that projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 is a game ball that flows down the game area PA and that is guided above the ball sorting unit 83 collides from above. . Although the detailed configuration will be described later, the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83 is formed so that the collision force from above is used as the rotational force of the rotator 81 for distribution. Therefore, each time the game ball collides with the ball sorting unit 83 from above, the sorting rotator 81 rotates in a predetermined direction. This predetermined direction is a counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG.

  In this way, the rotator for sorting 81 rotates in a predetermined direction every time a game ball collides with the ball allocating unit 83 from above, but only for rotation of 120 ° by the collision of one game sphere. The rotation amount is limited so that the body 81 rotates, and the rotation position of the sorting rotating body 81 is held at the position where the rotation amount is limited. Specifically, the first distribution mechanism 71 includes a rotation restricting piece 84 for the configuration. The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided at a position on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the rotator 81 for sorting. The rotation restricting piece 84 includes a shaft portion 85 and a restricting plate portion 86 that is integrally formed so as to protrude in a direction orthogonal to the shaft portion 85. The rotation restricting piece 84 is arranged so that the axial direction of the shaft portion 85 is the same as the axial direction of the rotator 81 for sorting, and the shaft portion 85 is received by a bearing portion (not shown). It is supported so as to be rotatable about the axial direction of 85.

  The rotation restricting piece 84 is provided with a spring member 87 as an urging means for urging the rotation restricting piece 84. The rotation restricting piece 84 is urged by the spring member 87 toward the side rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed in the state of FIG. 9, but the restricting plate portion 86 is applied to the rotation stopping member 88 from the original side in the urging direction. Further contact with the rotation restricting piece 84 is prevented by contact. The initial position of the rotation restricting piece 84 is the position where the restricting plate portion 86 abuts against the rotation stop member 88 from the original side in the biasing direction.

  The ball allocating portion 83 of the rotator 81 for distribution so as to be able to come into contact with the restricting plate portion 86 of the rotation restricting piece 84 arranged at the initial position from the front side in the urging direction by the spring member 87. Are integrally formed with contact protrusions 89a to 89c. The contact protrusions 89 a to 89 c are provided at 120 ° intervals as viewed in the rotation direction of the sorting rotator 81. Incidentally, these contact protrusions 89a to 89c are provided at positions that do not interfere with the distribution of a game ball, which will be described later, by the ball distribution unit 83.

  A restricting plate portion 86 of the rotation restricting piece 84 disposed at the initial position is present on the passage trajectory of each of the contact protrusions 89a to 89c accompanying the rotation of the sorting rotating body 81. Therefore, when the rotator for sorting 81 rotates in a predetermined direction, the contact protrusions 89a to 89c existing at positions close to the restricting plate portion 86 contact the restricting plate portion 86 from the original side in the rotation direction. Touch.

  Here, the urging force for urging the rotation restricting piece 84 to the initial position is such that when one game ball collides with the ball sorting portion 83 from above, one abutment projection 89a to 89c is the restricting plate portion. 86 is pushed out in the rotation direction so that the contact protrusions 89a to 89c can move to a position ahead of the restricting plate portion 86 in the rotation direction. The abutting projections 89a to 89c arranged at the next position are set to a force that prevents further movement by abutting against the restricting plate portion 86 returned to the initial position. That is, in the state of FIG. 9, when one game ball collides with the ball sorting unit 83 from above, the sorting rotating body 81 rotates in a predetermined direction by the rotational force caused by the collision, thereby causing the contact protrusion 89a. Pushes out the restricting plate portion 86. Thereby, the rotation restricting piece 84 rotates in the counter-biasing direction from the initial position. Thereafter, the contact protrusion 89a further moves in the predetermined direction along with the rotation of the sorting rotator 81 in a predetermined direction, so that the contact protrusion 89a moves to a position where it does not contact the restriction plate 86. Thus, the rotation restricting piece 84 returns to the initial position. After that, the contact protrusion 89 b positioned on the original side in the rotation direction in the predetermined direction is in contact with the restriction plate portion 86 with respect to the contact protrusion 89 a that was first in contact with the restriction plate portion 86. At this time, since the rotational force of the sorting rotator 81 due to the collision of one game ball is weakened to some extent, the sorting rotator is brought into contact with the contact projection 89b against the regulating plate 86. The rotational force 81 is received by the rotation restricting piece 84. As a result, further rotation of the sorting rotator 81 is prevented. Further, since the rotator 81 for distribution is formed so that the center of gravity exists at the center of rotation, the rotator 81 for distribution further rotates by the contact protrusion 89b contacting the restriction plate 86. In the case where the ball is blocked, until the game ball newly collides with the ball sorting unit 83, the vehicle waits at the blocked rotational position.

  With the above configuration, every time one game ball collides with the ball sorting unit 83 from above, the sorting rotating body 81 rotates 120 ° and stands by at the position rotated 120 °. In this case, on the outer peripheral surface of the ball allocating portion 83, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (c), different sphere vibrations are provided at intervals of 120 ° as viewed in the rotational direction of the allocating rotator 81. Minute regions 91 to 93 are formed. And in each stop position for every 120 ° of the rotator 81 for sorting, a state in which different ball sorting areas 91 to 93 are formed in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 It becomes. Each of the ball distribution areas 91 to 93 will be described below.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the portion where the first ball distribution area 91 is formed in the ball distribution unit 83 protrudes ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24. In the first ball distribution area 91, the flow direction of the game ball colliding with the ball distribution unit 83 from above is changed to the left, and the force when the game ball collides is rotated by the rotation of the distribution rotator 81. A leftward guiding portion 95 is integrally formed so as to change to force. The leftward guiding portion 95 protrudes outward from the surrounding surface on the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. Further, the left-facing guiding portion 95 is formed continuously from the edge wall portion 95a extending around the axis along the right edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and the sorting rotating body. An inclined wall portion 95b that is present on the left edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83 is provided toward the rotation destination side when 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball. In the situation where the first ball distribution area 91 is present at the front position, when a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the game ball is moved to the right by the edge wall portion 95a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 95b in a restricted state. The game ball receives a drag force directed to the left by colliding with the inclined wall portion 95 b, and the flow direction is changed toward the left of the ball sorting portion 83, to the left of the ball sorting portion 83. It will flow downward from the position of. Further, the sorting rotator 81 is rotated by 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the portion where the second ball sorting area 92 is formed in the ball sorting unit 83 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. The second ball distribution area 92 maintains the flow direction of the game ball that has collided with the ball distribution unit 83 from above, while maintaining the downward force of the game ball. A central guiding portion 96 is integrally formed so as to change to a rotational force. The central guiding portion 96 protrudes outward from the surrounding surface on the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. The central guiding portion 96 includes a pair of edge wall portions 96a and 96b extending around the axis along the left edge and the right edge on the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and a second ball sorting region 92. And an intermediate step portion 96c formed so as to protrude slightly outward at an intermediate position in the vertical direction. In the situation where the second ball distribution area 92 is present at the front position, when a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above, the game ball is separated by a pair of left and right edge wall portions 96a and 96b. It collides with the intermediate step 96c in a state where the movement to the left and right is restricted. Although the game ball receives a drag force directed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by colliding with the intermediate step portion 96c, the game panel 24 faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the window panel 17a disposed in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 24 The movement is restricted and flows down vertically. Further, the sorting rotator 81 rotates 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction when viewed in the state of FIG.

  FIG. 10 (c) shows a state in which the portion where the third ball distribution area 93 is formed in the ball distribution unit 83 protrudes ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24. In the third ball distribution area 93, the flow direction of the game ball colliding with the ball distribution unit 83 from above is changed to the right, and the force when the game ball collides is rotated by the rotation of the distribution rotating body 81. A rightward guiding portion 97 is integrally formed so as to change to force. The rightward guiding portion 97 projects outward from the surrounding surface on the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83. Further, the right-direction guiding portion 97 is formed continuously from the edge wall portion 97a extending around the axis along the left edge of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83, and from the edge wall portion 97a. An inclined wall portion 97b that is present on the right edge side of the outer peripheral surface of the ball sorting portion 83 is provided toward the rotation destination side when 81 is rotated by the force of the game ball. If a game ball flows into the position of the ball distribution unit 83 from above in a situation where the third ball distribution region 93 is present at the front position, the game ball is moved to the left by the edge wall 97a. It collides with the inclined wall portion 97b in a restricted state. The game ball receives a drag force directed to the right by colliding with the inclined wall portion 97b, the flow direction is changed toward the right side of the ball sorting portion 83, and the right side of the ball sorting portion 83. It will flow downward from the position of. Further, the sorting rotator 81 rotates 120 ° in the counterclockwise direction as viewed in the state of FIG. 9 by the collision force of the game ball received by the inclined wall portion 97b.

  With the above configuration, every time one game ball is supplied to the ball sorting unit 83 of the first sorting mechanism 71, the sorting direction of the game ball is changed to the left of the first sorting mechanism 71. Vertically below the first sorting mechanism 71 → right side of the first sorting mechanism 71 → left side of the first sorting mechanism 71 → vertically below the first sorting mechanism 71 → right side of the first sorting mechanism 71 → The first distribution mechanism 71 is sequentially changed in the order of the left side to. That is, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three, and the ratio of one to three Are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and are distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one in three.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the first distribution mechanism 71 having the above-described configuration is provided at the most upstream part of the right region PA3. The position where the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided in the right area PA3 is formed such that a center frame 40b provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 40 projects toward the right. As a result, the game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 always pass through, and the game balls pass one by one. Thereby, the game balls flowing from the upper area PA1 to the right area PA3 are always supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71. And as already explained, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three. One is distributed to the lower part of the first distribution mechanism 71 vertically, and one is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one to three.

  In the right area PA3, a first guide rail 99a for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to the lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. A second distribution mechanism 72 is provided at a position where the game balls are guided by the first guide rail 99a, and the game balls are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the first guide rail 99a. Surely reaches the second distribution mechanism 72.

  The second distribution mechanism 72 has the same configuration as the first distribution mechanism 71 as already described. Therefore, every time one game ball is supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first guide rail 99a, the distribution direction of the game ball changes to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72. → Vertical downward of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Right of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Left of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Vertical downward of the second distribution mechanism 72 → Right of the second distribution mechanism 72 → The left side of the second distribution mechanism 72 is sequentially changed in the order of. That is, the game balls supplied from above to the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72 by the first guide rail 99a are distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 at a ratio of one to three. One out of three is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72, and one out of three is distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72.

  The right area PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 99b for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower left position of the second distribution mechanism 72. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 99b, and the game ball guided to the left by the second guide rail 99b is surely distributed. Win a prize in the through winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and a winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated when the game ball passes through the through-hole in the vertical direction. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction continues to flow down in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 flows down vertically, the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 existing on the right side of the through winning portion 36, the first special figure winning device. 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not guided.

  The right area PA3 is provided with a third guide rail 99c for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 to a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. The branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c, and is distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided by the third guide rail 99c. The game ball surely wins the branch winning device 37 if the branch winning device 37 is in an open state. As described above, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and then the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the second derivation existing downstream of the first derivation area 65c. After being detected by one of the second trigger detection sensors 66c existing in the area 65d, the game board 24 is discharged to the back side. When the first opportunity detection sensor 66b detects the game ball, the first special figure winning device 33 enters the receiving state, and when the second opportunity detection sensor 66c detects the game ball, the second special figure winning device. 34 becomes an acceptance state.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 99c in a state where the branch winning device 37 is closed, the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without winning the branch winning device 37. To do. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the front of the branch side opening / closing member 62 of the branch winning device 37 flows down vertically, the through winning portion 36 that is present beside the branch winning device 37, the first The special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are not guided.

  The right area PA3 is provided with a fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 to the lower right position of the second distribution mechanism 72. The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d. In addition, the fourth guide rail 99d receives the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and the game balls distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71. The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are formed so as to be guided to a juxtaposed position.

  The first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction so that the first special figure winning device 33 is on the upper side. The passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 in the first special figure winning device 33 and the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 in the second special figure winning device 34 exist on the same axis, and these passage portions 59a are the fourth. It exists on the same axis as the exit portion of the guide rail 99d. Further, the distance between the exit portion of the fourth guide rail 99d and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 is less than one game ball, and the first special figure winning device 33 is provided. The distance between the exit portion of the passage portion 59a and the entrance portion of the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 is also less than one game ball. Therefore, when the game ball guided by the fourth guide rail 99d is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33, and the game ball has not won the first special figure winning device 33, The game ball is reliably guided to the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34.

  When the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state and the game ball is guided to the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 by the fourth guide rail 99d, the gaming ball is the first special figure. The winning device 33 will be won. Further, when the first special figure winning device 33 is in the non-accepting state and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state, the fourth guide rail 99d causes the game ball to enter the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33. Is guided, the game ball passes through the passage portion 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 and flows into the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34, and enters the second special figure winning device 34. Win a prize.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 99d in a state where both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the gaming ball is not in the first special figure winning device 34. The game area PA passes through the passage portions 59a of both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 without winning any of the figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34. Continue to flow down. In this case, since the game balls that have passed through both the passage parts 59a of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 flow down vertically, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 33 2 It is not guided to the through winning portion 36 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 existing on the right side of the special drawing winning device 34.

  Next, the manner in which the game balls are guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 11B shows the period in which the game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 11C shows a period in which game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 11D shows a game ball distribution to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71. FIG. 11E shows the timing at which the game balls are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11F shows the game balls being distributed to the left by the second distribution mechanism 72. 11 (g) shows a period in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72, and FIG. 11 (h) shows a game directed to the right by the second distribution mechanism 72. Indicates the period during which balls are distributed.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t1. At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t2, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B and FIG. 11C, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state where game balls are distributed toward the left to a state where game balls are distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order direction.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided by a first guide rail 99a provided in the game area PA. Since the second sorting mechanism 72 is provided at the guidance destination by the first guiding rail 99a as described above, a game ball is placed on the second sorting mechanism 72 at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. Supplied. At the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 11 (f), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which game balls are distributed to the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed toward the left side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, so that the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t3, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11F and FIG. 11G, the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the left to a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order direction.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by the second guide rail 99b provided in the game area PA. As described above, the through winning portion 36 is provided at the guidance destination by the second guide rail 99b, so that this game ball will surely win the through winning portion 36. When a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the usual figure display portion 46.

  Thereafter, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 11C, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the vertically lower side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t5, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11C and FIG. 11D, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward to a state in which game balls are distributed rightward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order direction. The game ball supplied vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game region PA. At this timing, since both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, both of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are used. Game balls will not win.

  Thereafter, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed to the right. Accordingly, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t7, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11D, the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state where game balls are distributed toward the right to a state where game balls are distributed toward the left. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the first distribution mechanism 71, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 is changed to the next order direction. The game ball supplied to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 by the fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game region PA. At this timing, since both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, both of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are used. Game balls will not win.

  Thereafter, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing t2, the first distribution mechanism 71 is moved to the left at the timing t9 as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C. The state changes from a state in which game balls are distributed toward the player to a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game balls are transferred to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 11 (e). Is supplied. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 11G, the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed toward the vertically lower side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t10, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11G and FIG. 11H, the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed vertically downward to a state in which game balls are distributed rightward. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order direction.

  The game balls distributed vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by a third guide rail 99c provided in the game area PA. As already described, the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize winning device 37 is provided at the guidance destination by the third guide rail 99c. If any of the high-probability states described later is used, the game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 of the game area PA in the shortest firing period (specifically, 0.6 seconds). By the time, the variation display of the pattern in the normal map display unit 46 has been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is surely opened. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 three times after the game balls won in the through winning portion 36 are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 71. At the timing of being guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 through the distribution mechanism 72, the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs. The game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is immediately detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, and the shortest launching period of the game ball (specifically 0. It is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c until a period shorter than 6 seconds).

  Thereafter, the same situation as the timing from t4 to t7 occurs at the timing from t11 to t14. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward at the timing of t12 to the right as shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 11 (d). Change to a state where the game balls are distributed, and at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 11B and FIG. 11D, the state where the game balls are distributed toward the right changes from the state where the game balls are distributed toward the left. To do. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 and the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t13 are both juxtaposed regions of the special prize winning devices 33 and 34. It will be guided to. In this case, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t9 are the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11. Before being guided to, the branch winning device 37 has already been won and detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. When a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 is changed from a closed state to an open state, and when a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, a second special ball is detected. The figure winning device 34 changes from the closed state to the open state. When the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the open state, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are changed from the open state to the closed state on condition that two game balls have won. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided through the fourth guide rail 99d at the timings t11 and t13 are the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34, respectively. Win a prize on the open side. Since two game balls win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the condition for shifting to the closed state is established, and the state changes from the open state to the closed state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the game balls are supplied again to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. At the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 11B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, as in the case of the timing of t2 and the timing of t9, the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t16 as shown in FIGS. Changes from a state where game balls are distributed toward the left to a state where game balls are distributed vertically downward.

  The game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided by the first guide rail 99a, so that the game balls are transferred to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing t16 as shown in FIG. 11 (e). Is supplied. At the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 11 (h), the state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is a state in which game balls are distributed to the right. Accordingly, the game balls supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 are distributed toward the right side of the second distribution mechanism 72. In this case, the game ball that is the target of the distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the second distribution mechanism 72, so that the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and at the timing of t17, FIG. As shown in (f) and FIG. 11 (h), the second distribution mechanism 72 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed toward the right to a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. That is, when the game balls are distributed once in the second distribution mechanism 72, the distribution direction of the game balls by the second distribution mechanism 72 is changed to the next order direction.

  The game balls distributed to the right of the second distribution mechanism 72 are guided by a fourth guide rail 99d provided in the game area PA. As already explained, there is a juxtaposed area for the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 at the destination of guidance by the fourth guide rail 99d. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second Since both of the special figure winning devices 34 are in a non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

  However, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t11 are placed in the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 before the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 to be released are opened. When guided, the game ball does not win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, at the timing when the game ball supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72 at the timing of t16 is guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33, 34, any of the special figure winning devices 33, 34 is still Since it is in the open state, the game ball will win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. As a result, the gaming ball detection timing in the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c is delayed from the assumed timing due to the movement mode of the gaming ball in the branch winning device 37, Even if the shift to the open state of the prize winning devices 33 and 34 is delayed, before the distribution state in the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 returns to the distribution state toward the through winning portion 36. In addition, it is possible to reliably generate two game balls, which is the upper limit number of winnings, in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 that are to be released.

  Thereafter, the same situation as the timing from t4 to timing t7 and the timing from t11 to t14 occurs at timing t18 to timing t21. As a result, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from the state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward at the timing of t19 to the right as shown in FIGS. 11 (c) and 11 (d). Change to a state where the game balls are distributed, and at the timing of t21, as shown in FIG. 11B and FIG. 11D, the state where the game balls are distributed toward the right changes from the state where the game balls are distributed toward the left. To do.

  In this case, both of these game balls are guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. At this guided timing, both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in a non-accepting state, and therefore, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device. No game ball is awarded to any of 34.

  Here, the first distribution mechanism 71 sequentially changes the distribution state of the game balls each time a game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. Similarly, the second distribution mechanism 72 sequentially changes the distribution state of the game balls each time a game ball is supplied, but the distribution state makes one round by supplying three game balls. In addition, only the game balls distributed toward the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 are supplied to the second distribution mechanism 72. Then, in order for the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to make one round, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71. In the state of FIG. 11, the timing of t21 is the timing at which nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, counting from the timing of t1, and the first distribution mechanism is at the timing of t21. When the game ball supplied to 71 changes the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing t22, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes the distribution state at the timing t1. At the timing t22, the distribution state of the second distribution mechanism 72 is also the distribution state at the timing t1. That is, a winning cycle of winning to the through winning unit 36 → winning to the branch winning device 37 → winning to the first special drawing winning device 33 or the second special drawing winning device 34 is generated in any high probability state described later. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to supply nine game balls to the right area PA3.

  In this case, the number of game balls awarded for winning one game ball to the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, and the branch winning device 37 is all three. In addition, when the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the open state, two game balls are won and the closed state is obtained. Furthermore, when a game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), within the range of nine game balls for generating the winning cycle. After the game balls that will win the branch winning device 37, there will be two game balls that will win the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 in the open state. As a result, in any of the high probability states described later, nine game balls for generating the above winning cycle cause the branch winning device 37 to win one game ball and become an open state. It is possible to generate two game balls in the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and in this case, nine game balls are paid out. Therefore, the winning cycle can be continued without reducing the number of game balls possessed by the player.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the second sorting mechanism 72 is provided in the guide path by the fourth guide rail 99d for guiding the game balls sorted by the first sorting mechanism 71 to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. The passage length dimension of the lower passage area is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the third guide rail 99c for guiding the game balls distributed by the second distribution mechanism 72 to the branch inlet 61. ing. As a result, the game balls distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 pass through the lateral position of the second distribution mechanism 72 until reaching the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. It is possible to secure a longer time than the time required for the game balls distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 to win the branch entrance 61. As a result, it is possible to ensure a long minimum period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 after winning the branch winning device 37.

  Even if a game ball enters the branch winning device 37, the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in an accepting state until the game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. There is no. In this case, since the shortest period required for the game ball to reach the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 after the winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs is secured long, the branch winning device. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the next order of the game balls that will win 37 will reach any of the special figure winnings before reaching the juxtaposed area of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. It becomes possible for the devices 33 and 34 to complete the transition to the acceptance state.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 101 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 101 has a main control board accommodated in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 101. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 102 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 103 and a control device assembly unit 104 are attached to the back pack 102.

  The payout mechanism 103 includes a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game ball paid out from the payout device 106 is discharged to the upper plate or the lower plate through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism 103 is provided with, for example, a main pack of AC 24 volts and a backpack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power.

  The control device assembly unit 104 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by the payout control device 107 having a function of controlling the payout device 106 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the player operating the launch operation device 28. And a power source / launch control device 108 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 107 and the power supply / launch control device 108 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 107 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 101 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 115 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 101.

  The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 112, a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main control device 101 is connected, and a payout control device 107 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 115 is connected to a power supply / launch control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 112 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 115.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 35c, 36a, 54, 66a, 66b and 66c (hereinafter also referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c) are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 66c include a general winning unit 31, a first special figure normal winning unit 32, a first special figure winning device 33, a second special figure winning device 34, a special electricity winning device 35, a through winning unit 36, and A detection sensor provided in a winning-corresponding winning portion such as the branch winning device 37 is included, and the MPU 112 makes a winning determination for each winning-corresponding winning portion. Further, the MPU 112 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32, the first special figure winning apparatus 33, the second special figure winning apparatus 34, or the through winning section 36.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, a payout control device 107, a power failure monitoring board 115, and a sound emission control device 121 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 107 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 121. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 112, a first special figure winning device 56a for operating the first special figure winning device 33 between the receiving state and the non-receiving state, and the second special drawing winning device 34 are in the receiving state. The second special figure winning drive unit 56b for operating between the first and second non-accepting states, the special electric drive unit 35b for opening and closing the opening / closing door 35a of the special electric winning device 35, and the branch winning device 37 branching A branch entrance drive unit 63 for opening and closing the side opening / closing member 62, a switching drive unit 68 for operating the switching piece 67 of the branch prize winning device 37, the special figure unit 45, and the universal map display unit 46 are connected. ing. Incidentally, the special figure unit 45 is provided with a first special figure display part 45a, a second special figure display part 45b, a first special figure reservation display part 45c, and a second special figure reservation display part 45d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, when the opening condition of the branch winning device 37 is satisfied, the MPU 112 performs drive control of the branch inlet driving unit 63 so that the branch inlet 61 of the branch winning device 37 is opened, and the switching piece. The drive control of the switching drive unit 68 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the 67 performs a predetermined operation described later. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37, the MPU 112 receives the first special figure winning drive unit in the MPU 112 so that the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. The drive control 56a is executed. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37, the MPU 112 receives the second special figure winning drive unit so that the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. The drive control 56b is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 112 performs drive control of the special electricity driving unit 35b so that the special electricity prize winning device 35 is opened and closed. Further, in the game round, the display control of the special figure unit 45 is executed in the MPU 112. In addition, when a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the MPU 112 executes display control of the normal display portion 46.

  The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power / fire control device 108, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 108. The payout control device 107 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

  The power source / launch control device 108 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 107, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 101. The power supply / launch control device 108 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 121 includes a sound emission control board 122 on which an MPU 123 is mounted. The MPU 123 includes a ROM 124 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 123 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 124 is executed. A certain RAM 125, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  Based on the command received from the main control device 101, the MPU 123 determines the contents of effects to be executed in the game times, opening / closing execution mode, and the like. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 18a provided on the front door frame 14 and sound output control of the speaker unit 18b provided on the front door frame 14 are performed so that an operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

  The MPU 123 is electrically connected to the display control device 126. The MPU 123 transmits to the display control device 126 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 101 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 101. The display control device 126 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 101>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 112 of the main controller 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 112 uses the various counter information during the game, and wins lottery, setting of the display of the first special figure display unit 45a, setting of the display of the second special figure display unit 45b, setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, The display setting of the figure display unit 46 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a winning random number counter C1 used for winning a lottery and a jackpot used for determining a jackpot type A type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for reaching generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure display unit 45a and 45b and the variation type counter CS that determines the display duration in the symbol display device 41 are used. Furthermore, the main power random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to open the branch winning device 37 in the low probability state to be described later is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 131 of the RAM 114.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 has been awarded to the first special figure normal winning unit 32, the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34. In this case, it is stored in the special figure reservation area 132. The special figure holding area 132 includes a first special figure holding area 133, a second special figure holding area 134, and a special drawing execution area 135.

  The first special figure reservation area 133 includes a first area 133a, a second area 133b, a third area 133c, and a fourth area 133d, and the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is provided. In accordance with the winning history, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 133a to 133d as the hold information on the special drawing side.

  In this case, in the first area 133a to the fourth area 133d, the first area 133a → when the winning to the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the second area 133b → third area 133c → fourth area 133d. By providing the four areas 133a to 133d in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 are stored on hold. It has become.

  In addition, the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The second special figure reservation area 134 includes a first area 134a, a second area 134b, a third area 134c, and a fourth area 134d. Each numerical value information of C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the areas 134a to 134d as reserved information on the special drawing side.

  In this case, in the first area 134a to the fourth area 134d, the first area 134a → the second area 134b → the third area 134c when a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. → The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area 134d. By providing the four areas 134a to 134d in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the second special figure winning device 34 are stored on hold.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The special figure execution area 135 stores hold information to be subjected to determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate and when the dynamic display is started by any of the special figure display units 45a and 45b. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 45a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 133a of the first special figure hold area 133 moves to the execution area 135 for the special figure. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 45b is started, the holding information stored in the first area 134a of the second special figure holding area 134 is moved to the execution area 135 for special figures.

  Information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in a general execution area 136 provided in the RAM 114 when a winning to the through winning unit 36 occurs. The execution area 136 for the usual drawing is a general-purpose random number counter C4 that is referred to in a lottery process for determining whether or not to open the branch winning device 37 in the low probability state to be described later when the through winning unit 36 is opened. This is an area where numerical information is stored. In the execution area 136 for general use, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs during a winning validity period in which a winning to the through winning portion 36 is valid in a low probability state to be described later, a general-purpose random number counter C4 Is stored.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure winning part 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. The game ball is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 of the special figure reservation area 132 at the timing when the game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34. Then, using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1, a determination process is performed.

  The random number value won in the determination process is stored in the ROM 113 as a determination table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize winning device 35 is controlled to open / close and the transition to the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure tables, there are a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is acquired based on the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 and the winning in the second special figure winning device 34. The same success / failure table is referred to by the hold information, and in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery.

  More specifically, each of the success / failure tables has two random number values (for example, “5” and “305”) as the jackpot result in the success / failure table for the low probability mode. The other values are random number values that are the result of removal. In the high-probability mode success / failure table, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is set to be larger than that in the low-probability mode success / failure table, specifically 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”, “334”, “365”, “392”, “420” ”,“ 470 ”,“ 495 ”,“ 520 ”,“ 558 ”,“ 575 ”,“ 599 ”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the first special figure holding area 133 of the special figure holding area 132 at the timing when the game ball wins the first special figure winning part 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. The game ball is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 of the special figure reservation area 132 at the timing when the game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34. Then, a distribution determination process is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the opening / closing. At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode is a gaming state in which a prize can be awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 35 by performing opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 35. In the opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game means that a special power-off device 35 is opened a predetermined number of times with a predetermined special-power-release period as an upper limit, and a predetermined upper-limit number of game balls are played. This is a game that continues until either one of the conditions for winning 35 is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode is set to 16, and in each round game, the opening of the special electricity prize winning device 35 having a special electricity release period of 29 sec and an upper limit number of 10 is one. Only executed once. In this case, as described above, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Therefore, the special electricity release period in each round game is longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming to win the special electric prize winning device 35 are normally fired, the number of game balls more than the upper limit number will win the special electric prize winning device 35 in each round game. Then, every time a prize is awarded to the special electricity prize winning device 35, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electricity prize winning device 35 is paid out. Therefore, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  The support mode is a type of gaming state that determines the frequency with which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed and the execution mode of the opening / closing control when a winning to the through winning unit 36 occurs. As the support mode, a low frequency support mode, a first high frequency support mode, and a second high frequency support mode are set. In the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed more frequently in response to the occurrence of winning in the through winning portion 36 than in the low-frequency support mode.

  Specifically, in the low frequency support mode, when the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the numerical information of the general power random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired numerical information is numerical information corresponding to the open winning. In this case, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The probability of winning the opening is arbitrary, but is set to 1/20, for example. In the low frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 is shifted to the open state only once, and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 in the opening time is a short period equal to or shorter than the game ball firing cycle. It is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs in the low frequency support mode and an open win is made, the probability that a winning in the branch winning device 37 will occur is low. In addition, as described above, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs and an open win is made, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not started immediately, but the winning in the through winning portion 36 is triggered. The opening / closing control of the branch prize-winning device 37 is started when the display of the variation of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 46 started as is finished. In this case, the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds.

  In the first high-frequency support mode, the open lottery process is not executed when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, and the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. Further, in the first high-frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 is shifted to the open state only once, and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 in the opening time is the game ball firing cycle × n (n is It is set to 0.8 seconds, which is a long period of an integer of 1 or more. Therefore, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs in the first high frequency support mode, there is a high probability that a winning to the branch winning device 37 will occur. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins the branch winning device 37 even if the opening continuation period has not elapsed.

  As described above, the branch winning device 37 is provided with the switching piece 67, and when the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is applied to the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. When the switching piece 67 is arranged at the guidance position, the game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. In this configuration, when the switching piece 67 enters a state in which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically 0.9 seconds) from the start timing of the first opening of the branch winning device 37. Is held at the retracted position until elapses, and when the switching standby period elapses, the position is switched from the retracted position to the guiding position and held at the guiding position. In such a configuration, in the first high-frequency support mode, the open state of the branch winning device 37 is started and the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses while the switching piece 67 is held at the retracted position. The switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position until a timing later than the timing. Furthermore, in the first high-frequency support mode, even if a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs at a timing when the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the game piece is held in the retreat position of the game ball. The game ball passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the set period. Therefore, the game ball won in the branch winning device 37 in the first high-frequency support mode is surely detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, and the game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. The first special figure winning device 33 is opened.

  In addition, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not started immediately, but in the general display display portion 46 that is started when winning through the through winning portion 36 is triggered. When the change display of the pattern is finished, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the first high-frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern is constant at 1.5 seconds, which is a time longer than twice the firing period of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, since this variable display period is set to 1.5 seconds, a game ball is supplied to the right area PA3 in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). , The game balls in the order of three after the game balls winning the through winning portion 36 are branched into the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37 by the first sorting mechanism 71, the second sorting mechanism 72, and the third guide rail 99c. The branch winning device 37 is in an open state at the timing of being guided to

  In the second high-frequency support mode, the open lottery process is not executed when the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, and the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed. Further, in the second high frequency support mode, the branch winning device 37 is shifted to the open state twice, and in the first opening time, the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 is the above-described short period (0.1 second). In the second opening, the opening continuation period of the branch winning device 37 is set to the above-described long period (0.8 seconds). Therefore, the probability of winning the branch winning device 37 in the first opening round is low, and the probability of winning in the branch winning device 37 is high in the second opening round. The open state of the branch winning device 37 ends when one game ball wins the branch winning device 37 even if the opening continuation period has not elapsed. In this case, if a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs at the first opening time, the second opening time is not executed. Between the first opening time and the second opening time, a closing continuation period in which the branch prize winning device 37 is maintained in a closed state is set, and this closing continuation period is 0.8 which is the same as the above long period. Is set to seconds.

  As already described, when the switching piece 67 of the branch prize winning device 37 is in a state in which the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37 is executed, the switching waiting period (specifically, from the start timing of the first opening of the branch prize winning device 37) 0.9 seconds) is maintained at the retracted position, and when the switching standby period elapses, the retracted position is switched to the guiding position, and the guiding position is maintained. In the case of such a configuration, in the second high-frequency support mode, the second open state of the branch winning device 37 is started in a period in which the switching piece 67 is switched to the guidance position and is held at the guidance position. The switching piece 67 is held in the guiding position until a timing after the timing when the opening continuation period of the second opening state elapses. Furthermore, in the second high-frequency support mode, even if a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs at the timing when the opening continuation period of the second opening state elapses, the game piece of the game ball is in the guiding position. The game ball passes through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 within the range of the held period. Therefore, the game ball won in the branch winning device 37 in the second high-frequency support mode is reliably detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c, and the game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Thus, the second special figure winning device 34 is opened.

  In addition, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not started immediately, but in the general display display portion 46 that is started when winning through the through winning portion 36 is triggered. When the change display of the pattern is finished, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started. In this case, in the second high frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern is constant at 0.7 seconds, which is a shorter time than in the first high frequency support mode. As will be described in detail later, this variable display period is set to 0.7 seconds, and in the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 in the second high-frequency support mode, the opening continuation period of the first opening is 0.1. And the closing duration from the end of the first opening to the start of the second opening is set to 0.8 seconds, so that the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds), in the state where the game balls are supplied to the right area PA3, the game balls in the third order after the game balls winning the through winning portion 36 are the first distribution mechanism 71, the second swing At the timing when the branch mechanism 72 and the third guide rail 99c are guided to the branch inlet 61 of the branch winning device 37, the branch winning device 37 is in the open state by the second opening.

  The types of jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the ROM 113 as a sorting table. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the allocation table includes, as types of jackpot results, a low-accuracy response result, an 8R first high-accuracy response result, and an 8R second high-accuracy result. A response result and a 16R second high-accuracy response result are set. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each jackpot result.

  In the low-accuracy response result, an open / close execution mode in which 8 round games occur is set. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the low-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. This low probability mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the low-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This infrequent support mode is the next jackpot result and continues until it shifts to the open / close execution mode. Note that a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the low probability state. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode before and after the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the first high-accuracy response result of 8R, it becomes an opening / closing execution mode in which 8 round games occur. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is changed. Further, this high probability mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the first high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This first high-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Note that a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode is the first high probability state.

  The result of the second high-accuracy response of 8R is an opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games are generated. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is changed. Further, this high probability mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the second high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts. This second high-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Note that a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode is the second high probability state.

  The result of the second high-accuracy response of 16R is an opening / closing execution mode in which 16 round games occur. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is changed. Further, this high probability mode is the next jackpot result, and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the second high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts. This second high-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result and continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a) and FIG. 14 (b), the allocation table includes a distribution of the hold information acquired based on winning in the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. A distribution table for the first special figure used in the minute determination process and a second special figure used in the distribution determination process for the hold information acquired based on winning in the second special figure winning device 34 A distribution table is set.

  The distribution table for the first special drawing will be described in detail as shown in FIG. 14A. As the type of the jackpot result to be distributed, The first high-accuracy response result of 8R, the second high-accuracy response result of 8R, and the second high-accuracy response result of 16R are set. In the distribution table for the first special figure, “0 to 19” corresponds to the low-accuracy correspondence result, “20 to 59” corresponds to the first high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and “60 "-89" corresponds to the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 8R, and "90-99" corresponds to the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the distribution table for the first special figure, the probability of a low-accuracy response result is 20% and the probability of an 8R first high-accuracy response result is 40% when a big win is won. , The probability of being the second highly accurate correspondence result of 8R is 30%, and the probability of being the second highly accurate correspondence result of 16R is 10%.

  Opening / closing is performed when a low-accuracy response result, an 8R first high-accuracy response result, or an 8R second high-accuracy response result is obtained based on winning in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 In the mode, a round game is performed with the upper limit of 8 times, and the special electric prize winning device 35 is opened and closed once in each round game. That is, when the low-accuracy response result, the 8R first high-accuracy response result, or the 8R second high-accuracy response result, the operation mode of the special prize winning device 35 in the opening / closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game times when these game results are obtained, although different stop results are displayed on the first special figure display unit 45a, the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display unit 45a. In the displayed symbol display device 41, the stop result is displayed in such a manner that identification is impossible. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same even number of symbol combinations on any active line. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by either the low-accuracy response result, the 8R first high-accuracy response result, or the 8R second high-accuracy response result, which jackpot result is triggered until the ending period starts. The effect is executed in such a manner that it cannot be distinguished whether the open / close execution mode is selected. As a result, when an opening / closing execution mode in which eight round games are executed occurs, the player is expected to transition to the first high probability state or the second high probability state after the opening / closing execution mode ends. And playing a game while expecting that the player has shifted to the second high probability state that is advantageous to the player among the first high probability state and the second high probability state. Become. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the second special chart allocation table is set with a low-accuracy response result and a 16R second high-accuracy response result as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. ing. In the distribution table for the second special figure, “0-19” corresponds to the low-accuracy correspondence result, and “20-99” corresponds to the second high-accuracy correspondence result of 16R. In the case of the distribution table for the second special figure, when a big hit is won, the probability of being a low-accuracy response result is 20%, and the probability of being a second high-accuracy response result of 16R is 80%. .

  The distribution table for the first special figure and the distribution table for the second special figure have the same probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode when the big win is won. On the other hand, the probability of the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is generated 16 times is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Furthermore, the probability of the second high probability corresponding result that becomes a trigger for the transition to the second high probability state is higher in the distribution table for the second special figure than in the distribution table for the first special figure. Therefore, the types of jackpot results that can be selected when winning the jackpot is greater than the case where an internal lottery is performed when the first special figure normal winning section 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is won. It is more advantageous for the player when a prize is entered into the second special figure winning device 34 and an internal lottery is performed.

  The winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state and the second high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 16 (a1) to 16 (f1), the winning mode of the game ball in the first high probability state will be described. FIG. 16 (a1) shows the timing at which a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right area PA3, FIG. 16 (b1) shows the winning timing to the through winning portion 36, and FIG. 16 (c1) FIG. 16 (d1) shows a period during which the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, FIG. 16 (e1) shows a winning timing for the branch winning device 37, and FIG. FIG. 16 (f1) shows a period during which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the guidance position.

  When the game operation ball 28 is continuously operated in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be played in the shortest shooting cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). The game area PA is supplied. In this case, when the operation amount by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right region PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right region PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 16 (a1), at each of the timing t1, the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t6, and the timing t8, the game ball is transferred to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period. Supplied.

  At the timing of t1, each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36, so the first distribution at the timing of t1. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning portion 36 at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 16 (b1). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c1), the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started at the timing t2. The variation display period of this pattern variation display is 1.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, at each of the timing t3 and the timing t4 in which the variable display of the picture is continuously displayed on the general map display unit 46, a game ball is placed on the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a1). Supplied. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is distributed at the timings t3 and t4. The game balls supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. However, since both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (c1), the variation display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 ends at the timing of t5. Since the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode in the first high-probability state, the branch winning device 37 as shown in FIG. Becomes an open state. This open state continues for a maximum of 0.8 seconds. Further, when the first opening of the branch prize winning device 37 is started at the timing of t5, the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position as shown in FIG. 16 (f1).

  Thereafter, at a timing t6 when the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since each distribution state of the 1st distribution mechanism 71 and the 2nd distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state which guides a game ball to the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize-winning device 37, it is the timing at the timing of t6. The game balls supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 win the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 16 (e1).

  The game ball winning the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t7 finishes passing the game ball switching position by the switching piece 67 in a period shorter than the shortest firing cycle. In this case, when the winning to the branch winning device 37 does not occur, the open state of the branch winning device 37 is continued until the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 16 (d1). Even if the game ball wins the branch winning device 37 at the timing t9, which is the timing when the branch winning device 37 shifts to the closed state, the switching piece 67 is held in the retracted position until the subsequent t10, The period from the timing t9 to the timing t10 is longer than the longest period required for the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 to finish passing the game ball switching position by the switching piece 67. Accordingly, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state finishes passing through the switching position of the game ball by the switching piece 67 in the situation where the switching piece 67 is disposed at the retracted position. It will be detected by the trigger detection sensor 66b. When a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the first special figure winning device 33 enters a receiving state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the game ball is supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing t8. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, since the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state at this guidance timing, a winning to the first special figure winning device 33 occurs.

  Depending on the flow-down state of the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 at the timing t7 in the branch winning device 37, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing t8 are the special figure winning devices 33, 34. There is a possibility that the first special figure winning device 33 has not yet been received at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, since the supply of the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 to the through winning portion 36 occurs in a cycle of nine, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the timing t8 until the state becomes a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. These four game balls are all guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Therefore, two or more game balls are guided to the first special figure winning device 33 in the receiving state before the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Therefore, until the game ball is guided to the through winning portion 36, the upper limit winning number of game balls are awarded to the first special figure winning device 33, and the first special figure winning device 33 receives it. It will shift from the state to the non-acceptance state. There is a condition that the variation display of the pattern is not performed in the general map display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in an open state, and each special figure winning device 33, 34 is in a non-accepting state. As shown, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is validated. In this case, the through winning portion is obtained by completing the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls to the first special figure winning device 33 within the range of the nine gaming balls supplied to the right area PA3 as described above. In a state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make a state in which winning to the through winning portion 36 is activated.

  Next, the winning mode of the game ball in the second high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a2) to 16 (f2). FIG. 16 (a2) shows the timing when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right area PA3, FIG. 16 (b2) shows the winning timing to the through winning portion 36, and FIG. 16 (c2) shows the winning timing. FIG. 16 (d2) shows a period during which the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, FIG. 16 (e2) shows a winning timing for the branch winning device 37, and FIG. FIG. 16 (f2) shows a period during which the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the guidance position.

  When the game operation ball 28 is continuously operated in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be played in the shortest shooting cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). The game area PA is supplied. In this case, when the operation amount by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right region PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right region PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (a2), at the timing of t11, the timing of t13, the timing of t16, the timing of t17, and the timing of t20, the first distribution mechanism 71 is played with the shortest firing period. A ball is supplied.

  At the timing of t11, each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is in a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. The game ball supplied to the mechanism 71 wins the through winning portion 36 at the timing t12 as shown in FIG. 16 (b2). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16 (c2), the display of the variation of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started at the timing t12. The variation display period of this pattern variation display is 0.7 seconds.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, which is a situation in which the variable display of the picture is continuously displayed on the normal diagram display unit 46, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 16 (a2). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing t13. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. However, since both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (c2), the variation display of the picture on the general map display unit 46 is finished at the timing of t14. Since the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode in the second high probability state, as shown in FIG. Is the first open state. Since the open continuation period in this open state is 0.1 second, there is a low possibility of winning the branch winning device 37. Furthermore, during the 0.1 second opening continuation period, the game ball is guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize winning device 37 in relation to the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. It will never be done. Therefore, the first open state of the branch winning device 37 started at the timing t14 ends at the timing t15 without generating a winning to the branch winning device 37, and the branch winning device 37 is closed.

  Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is arranged at the retreat position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started when the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the switching piece 67 is arranged at the retracted position at the timing t14.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, which is the state of the closing continuation period in which the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is maintained, the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing t13. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. However, since both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are in the non-accepting state, the game ball is not won in any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t17, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, each distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a distribution state in which a game ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize winning device 37. The game balls supplied to the one distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. In this configuration, the closing duration elapses at a timing t18, which is a timing before the gaming ball is guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, and the branching is performed as shown in FIG. 16 (d2). The winning device 37 is opened for the second time. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (f2), the arrangement state of the switching piece 67 is switched from the retracted position to the guiding position at the timing of t18.

  At the timing t19 when the branch winning device 37 is in the second open state and the switching piece 67 is disposed at the guidance position, as shown in FIG. 16 (e2), the timing at t17 The game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 wins the branch winning device 37. The game ball is detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c because the game ball has finished passing the game ball switching position by the switch piece 67 in a state where the switch piece 67 is disposed at the guidance position. When a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t20, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism at the timing t20. The game balls supplied to 71 are guided to the juxtaposed areas of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. In this case, since the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state at this guidance timing, a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs.

  The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t20 are supplied to the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 depending on the flow-down state of the game balls that have won the branch winning device 37 at the timing of t19. There is a possibility that the second special figure winning device 34 has not yet been received at the timing of being guided to the juxtaposed area. Even in this case, since the supply of the game ball supplied to the right area PA3 to the through winning portion 36 occurs in a cycle of nine, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 Four game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the timing t20 until the state becomes a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. These four game balls are all guided to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Therefore, two or more game balls are guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state before the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36. Therefore, until the game ball is guided to the through winning portion 36, the upper limit winning number of game balls are awarded to the second special figure winning device 34, and the second special figure winning device 34 receives it. It will shift from the state to the non-acceptance state. There is a condition that the variation display of the pattern is not performed in the general map display unit 46, the branch winning device 37 is not in an open state, and each special figure winning device 33, 34 is in a non-accepting state. As shown, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is validated. In this case, the through winning portion is obtained by completing the winning of the upper limit winning number of game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 within the range of nine game balls supplied to the right area PA3 as described above. In a state where the game ball is guided to 36, it is possible to make a state in which winning to the through winning portion 36 is activated.

  As described above, in the first high probability state, the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, whereby the first special figure winning device 33 enters the receiving state, and the second high In the probability state, the second special figure winning device 34 enters the receiving state when the game ball that has won the branch winning device 37 is reliably detected by the second trigger detection sensor 66c. Then, as described above, the MPU 112 performs the lottery process with the winning of the second special figure winning device 34 as compared to the case where the MPU 112 executes the lottery process with the winning of the first special figure winning device 33 as described above. When executed, the distribution mode of the jackpot result is more advantageous for the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the gaming state more advantageous in the second high probability state than in the first high probability state.

  By each operation of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 after the three game balls won in the through winning portion 36 enter the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. Be guided. This makes it possible to fix the number of game balls required from when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs until a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs to three.

  In this case, in the first high probability state, the variable display period of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is fixed to 1.5 seconds, which is the variable display period for the first high probability state. In addition, when the change display of the picture on the normal display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and the open state has an open duration so that the branch winning device 37 can be won. Set to 0.8 seconds. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is disposed at the retracted position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being disposed at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. The As a result, at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 after three game balls winning the through winning portion 36 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, the branch winning device 37 is opened. This makes it possible to win the branch winning device 37 and to detect the game ball by the first trigger detection sensor 66b.

  In the second high-probability state, the variable display period of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds, which is the variable display period for the second high-probability state. In addition, when the change display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the first opening, and the opened state makes it impossible to win the branch winning device 37. Is set to 0.1 seconds. After that, the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the closed state for 0.8 seconds which is the closing continuation period, and when the closing continuation period elapses, the branch winning device 37 is opened as the second opening time. In this open state, the open continuation period is set to 0.8 seconds so that the branch winning device 37 can be won. Further, the switching piece 67 of the branch winning device 37 is disposed at the retracted position at the timing when the first open state of the branch winning device 37 is started, and the state of being disposed at the retracted position is maintained until the switching standby period elapses. The Since this switching waiting period elapses at the timing when the closing continuation period of the branch winning device 37 elapses, the switching piece 67 is moved from the retracted position to the guiding position at the timing when the branch winning device 37 is opened by the second opening. Can be switched. As a result, at the timing when the game balls supplied to the right area PA3 after three game balls winning the through winning portion 36 are guided to the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, the branch winning device 37 is opened. This makes it possible to win the branch winning device 37 and to detect the game ball by the second trigger detection sensor 66c.

  On the other hand, in the low-probability state, the variable display period of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is fixed to 0.7 seconds. In addition, when the variable display of the picture on the normal display unit 46 is finished, the branch winning device 37 is in an open state, and the open duration of the open state is set to 0.1 second. In this configuration, even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three game balls won in the through winning portion 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the branch entrance 61, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed, and the branch winning device 37 is closed. Therefore, in the low probability state, even if the branch winning device 37 can be in the open state, it is substantially impossible to win the branch winning device 37.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs are set. In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the symbols in the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in that state. A display state for performing variable display is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire symbol display device 41 after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbols, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the symbol columns and a plurality of symbols. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the columns, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 113 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. To be executed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the MPU 112 but by the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121. In this case, in the MPU 123, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed result, and a notice display having a low appearance rate is likely to occur. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the above conditions. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 112 determines the display continuation period in the first special figure display unit 45a or the second special figure display unit 45b and the symbol display continuation period in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first special symbol display unit 45a or the second special symbol display unit 45b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. To be acquired.

  Next, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the execution area 136 for normal use at the timing when a game ball wins the through winning portion 36 in a low probability state. Then, using the stored numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the branch winning device 37 to the open state.

<Regarding Premise Processing Configuration in MPU 112>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in MPU112 is demonstrated. The processing of the MPU 112 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 114 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 112 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power / fire control device 108 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 114 is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 114 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 114. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 114, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, a frequency dividing circuit so as to exist in the middle of a signal path between the clock circuit and the MPU 112. Is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 112. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 112 at intervals of a specific period of 4 milliseconds. The MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 112, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 milliseconds have elapsed since the previous timer interrupt process started. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 milliseconds have elapsed since the immediately preceding timer interrupt process was started.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 milliseconds regardless of the progress of the processing in the MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 is such that the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is the next timing after the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt process is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started. In the timer interrupt processing at, the portion exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

  In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the RAM 114.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 35b, 56a, 56b, 63, 68 is executed. To do. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 35 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 35b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the first special figure winning device 33 to the accepting state is set, the output of the drive signal to the first special figure winning unit 56a should be started and switched to the non-accepting state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the second special figure winning device 34 to the accepting state is set, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning unit 56b should be started and switched to the non-accepting state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the branch winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the branch entrance driving unit 63 is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 67 to the retracted position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 is started, and when the information to be switched to the guiding position is set, Stop driving signal output.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 32a to 66c are read, and the general winning unit 31, the first special figure normal winning unit 32, the first special figure winning device 33, and the second special figure winning are obtained. A process of specifying whether or not there is a ball entering the device 34, the special electricity winning device 35, the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 114 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 28, as already described, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 32a to 66c and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. Do.

  In the subsequent step S213, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S214, a general-purpose normal power control process for executing display control of the general-purpose display unit 46, drive control of the branch winning device 37, and the like is executed. The processing contents of the ordinary map / electric power control processing will be described later in detail.

  In subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the first special figure display unit 45a in the first special figure hold display unit 45c. Setting and setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the second special figure display unit 45b to the second special figure hold display unit 45d. In step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 45a and the second special figure display unit 45b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. The output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 46 is set.

  In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 107 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing of steps S207 to S218, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, the ordinary power transmission control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) of the MPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, the information of the ordinary power / general electricity counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S301), and the ordinary / electric power address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S302). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose power counter is obtained from the general-purpose power address table (step S303).

  In the ordinary figure power control process, the presence or absence of winning in the through winning part 36 is monitored, and the fluctuation of the usual figure for starting the display of the variation of the picture in the ordinary figure display part 46 triggered by the winning in the through winning part 36. A start process (step S305) and a process during normal map change (step S306) for updating the change display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 and starting the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 when the variable display period has elapsed. ) And a process during normal operation (step S307) for executing the open / close control of the branch winning device 37. In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. A start address of a program for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter. When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. Corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process, 1 is added or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter. It should be noted that “0” is set as the initial value of the ordinary power counter.

  After executing the process of step S303, in step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S303 is executed. More specifically, if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the normal-number fluctuation start process in step S305, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “1”. The routine jumps to the processing during normal map fluctuation of S306, and when the value of the counter for normal power transmission is “2”, the routine jumps to the processing during normal power transmission operation of step S307.

  In the ordinary figure electric power control process, after executing any one of the processes in steps S305 to S307, a process for executing the opening / closing control of the first special figure winning device 33 (step S308) and the second special figure. A process (step S309) for executing opening / closing control of the winning device 34 is executed. Hereinafter, each process of step S305 to step S309 will be described in detail.

<Normal map change start processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the general map change start process executed in step S305 in the general map normal power control process (FIG. 19).

  First, it is determined whether or not the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401). The state in which the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed means that the first special figure winning is triggered by the fact that the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 detects the game ball. A game ball in a situation where a condition for accepting the device 33 is satisfied (including a situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state) and a second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 This is a situation in which a condition for allowing the second special figure winning device 34 to be in an accepting state is satisfied (including a situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in an accepting state). If the acceptance control of any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed (step S401: YES), a process for determining whether or not a winning to the through winning unit 36 has occurred (step S402). This ordinary figure change start process is terminated without executing. As a result, in the situation where the acceptance control of one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is being executed, even if the winning of the through winning portion 36 is invalidated and the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, it is normal. The change display of the picture on the figure display unit 46 is not started, and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is not executed.

  Here, the common figure change start process is not executed in the situation where the change display of the pattern in the general figure display unit 46 is executed and in the situation where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. Then, even in these situations, the winning of the through winning portion 36 is invalidated. In other words, the situation in which the variable display of the picture is displayed on the general-purpose display unit 46, the situation in which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed, and the acceptance control of one of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are executed. In such a situation, winning in the through winning portion 36 is invalidated, and in other situations, winning in the through winning portion 36 is validated. In this case, winning in the through winning portion 36 is validated even in the opening / closing execution mode. When an effective winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs in the opening / closing execution mode, the same processing as that in the low frequency support mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the same processing as in the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is executed when a valid winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which winning in the through winning portion 36 is invalidated in the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the acceptance control is not executed for both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 (step S401: NO), and a winning to the through winning portion 36 has occurred. (Step S402: YES), by checking whether or not “1” is set in the flag corresponding to any one of the high probability states in the RAM 114, either the first high probability state or the second high probability state Is determined (step S403). When it is in a low probability state (step S403: NO), an open lottery process is executed (step S404). In the open lottery process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is read out to the execution area 136 for ordinary drawings. Then, the open lottery table is read from the ROM 113, and it is grasped by referring to the open lottery table whether or not the numerical information read in the execution area 136 for general use is the numerical information corresponding to the open winning, The grasping result is stored in the RAM 114. Thereafter, numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set in the normal fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 as the fluctuation display period for the low probability state (step S405). On the other hand, in the case of the first high probability state (step S403 and step S406: YES), numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds is used as the fluctuation display period for the first high probability state, and the normal variation measurement of the RAM 114 is performed. The counter is set (step S407). In the case of the second high probability state (step S403: YES, step S406: NO), numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds is displayed in the RAM 114 as the variable display period for the second high probability state. The variation measurement counter is set (step S408). The value set in the universal fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal figure change measurement counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the picture change display on the normal figure display unit 46.

  After executing one of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408, the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started (step S409). In this case, even if any of the processes of step S405, step S407, and step S408 is executed, the form of the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46 at the start timing of the pattern change display is the same. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner in any situation, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, before the display of the variation of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is started, the display of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed in the previous variation display time of the pattern in the general diagram display unit 46 is continued. It has become. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ordinary power counter (step S410). As a result, the execution target of the normal map power control process (FIG. 19) is the normal map change process (step S306).

<Processing during normal changes>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the normal-fluctuation changing process executed in step S306 in the normal-use normal power control process (FIG. 19).

  In the process of changing the normal map, if the value of the normal map fluctuation measurement counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S501: NO), it means that the end timing of the pattern change display on the general map display unit 46 is not reached. Therefore, display content update processing is executed (step S502). In the display content update process, on the condition that the display content of the general map display unit 46 is updated, the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46 is updated to the next pattern. In this case, regardless of whether the state is the low probability state, the first high probability state, or the second high probability state, the pattern update mode is constant, and in the low probability state, the winning lottery process is performed in the open lottery process. Regardless of whether or not it has become, the pattern update mode is constant. As a result, it is possible to update the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 in the same manner in any situation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  If it is the end timing of the pattern change display in the normal map display unit 46 (step S501: YES), if the low probability state (step S503: NO), the step S404 is released in the normal map change start process (FIG. 20). It is determined whether or not an open winning is made in the lottery process (step S504). If the winning combination is not made (step S504: NO), the value of the ordinary power / general counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S505). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal map / electric power control process (FIG. 19) is the normal map change start process (step S305).

  When it is in a low probability state (step S503: NO) and the open win is selected (step S504: YES), the utility power open count counter provided in the RAM 114 is set to “1” and provided in the RAM 114. Then, numerical information corresponding to 0.1 second, which is the short open period, is set in the normal electric power open period counter (step S506). On the other hand, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 (step S501: YES), and when it is in the first high probability state (step S503 and step S507: YES), the ordinary power of the RAM 114 “1” is set in the number-of-opening counter, and numerical information corresponding to the long open period of 0.8 seconds is set in the normal power open period counter of the RAM 114 (step S508). Further, when it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the normal map display unit 46 (step S501: YES), and when it is in the second high probability state (step S503: YES, step S507: NO), the RAM 114 In addition to setting “2” in the common power release number counter, numerical information corresponding to 0.1 seconds, which is the short open period, is set in the general power release period counter of the RAM 114 (step S509). The common power open / close counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of times that the branch winning device 37 is opened in a situation where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed. The public power open period counter is a counter for specifying in MPU 112 the remaining longest period until the branch winning device 37 is closed when the branch winning device 37 is opened. The value set in the public power release period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the public power open period counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is specified that it is the end timing of the current opening round in the branch winning device 37.

  When any one of steps S506, S508, and S509 is executed, a process of switching to the retracted position is executed (step S510). In the switching process, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the guide position to the retracted position by starting to output a drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch prize winning device 37. Also, numerical information corresponding to 0.9 second which is the switching standby period is set in the switching standby counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S511). The value set in the switching standby counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the switching standby counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is specified that it is time to switch the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position.

  Then, the opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S512). In the opening process, the branch side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the opening position by starting to output a driving signal to the branch inlet driving unit 63. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. When the branch winning device 37 is in the open state, “1” is set in the open state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can identify whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in an open state by checking whether or not “1” is set in the open state flag.

  Also, numerical information corresponding to the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is set in the monitoring period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S513). The monitoring period of the trigger winning prize is due to an illegal act when the gaming ball is detected by either the first trigger detecting sensor 66b or the second trigger detecting sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37. This is a reference period for specifying whether or not. If a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c during the measurement of the trigger prize monitoring period, the detection of the game ball is treated as normal, and the trigger prize is monitored. When a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c after the period has elapsed, the detection of the game ball is treated as abnormal. If the monitoring period of the opportunity winning is the first high probability state, the opening continuation period in one opening time in the branch winning device 37, and the game ball winning the branch winning device 37 is the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity. It is set as a period equal to or longer than the sum of the longest period assumed as a period until detection by any of the detection sensors 66c. Specifically, it is set to 2.0 seconds. If the second high probability state, the opening continuation period in the first opening time in the branch winning device 37, the closing continuation period between the first opening time and the second opening time in the branch winning device 37, An opening continuation period at the second opening time in the branch winning device 37 and a period until a game ball won in the branch winning device 37 is detected by either the first trigger detection sensor 66b or the second trigger detection sensor 66c. It is set as a period longer than the sum of the expected maximum period. Specifically, it is set to 3.0 seconds. Thus, by setting the monitoring period of the opportunity prize, it is specified whether or not the detection of the game ball in the first opportunity detection sensor 66b and the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch prize winning device 37 is normal. It becomes possible to do.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the normal power counter in the RAM 114 (step S514). Thereby, the execution target of the process in the ordinary power transmission control process (FIG. 19) is the normal power transmission operation process (step S307).

<Processing during normal operation>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal power operation process executed in step S307 in the normal power control process (FIG. 19).

  When the branch winning device 37 is in an open state (step S601: YES), it is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37, thereby winning the branch winning device 37. Whether or not has occurred is determined (step S602). In the case where the winning in the branch winning device 37 has not occurred (step S602: NO), it is determined in the branch winning device 37 by determining whether or not the value of the normal power open period counter in the RAM 114 is “0”. It is determined whether or not the opening duration of the current opening has elapsed (step S603).

  When the open duration has elapsed (step S603: YES), the value of the normal power open count counter in the RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S604). If the value of the general electric power opening number counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S605: NO), the closing process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S606). In the closing process, the branch side opening / closing member 62 is displaced to the closed position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the branch inlet drive unit 63. As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. When the branch winning device 37 is closed, the open state flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”. After that, numerical information corresponding to 0.8 second which is the closing continuation period is set in the normal power closing period counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S607). The value set in the general electric power closing period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal electricity closing period counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, it is specified that the closing continuation period in the branch winning device 37 has elapsed.

  When a winning to the branch winning device 37 has occurred (step S602: YES), or when the value of the counter for the number of open electricity after subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S605: YES), the same as step S606 The closing process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S608). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is closed. Thereafter, “1” is set to an opening end flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S609). The open end flag specifies in the MPU 112 that all the transitions from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning device 37 have been completed in the current opening / closing control in the branch winning device 37 triggered by winning the through winning portion 36. It is a flag to do.

  When the branch winning device 37 is in the closed state (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the main power closing period counter in the RAM 114 is “0”, thereby closing the branch winning device 37 in the closing duration. It is determined whether or not elapses (step S610). When the closing continuation period has elapsed (step S610: YES), the opening process of the branch winning device 37 is executed (step S611) in the same manner as step S512 in the normal chart changing process (FIG. 21). As a result, the branch winning device 37 is opened. Also, in the release process, numerical information corresponding to the long open period of 0.8 seconds is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. Thereby, in this opening | release time, the branch winning apparatus 37 will be in an open state over 0.8 second at maximum.

  In the normal power operation process, it is determined whether or not the switching standby period has elapsed by determining whether or not the value of the switching standby counter in the RAM 114 is “0” (step S612). When the switching standby period has elapsed (step S612: YES), a process for switching to the guidance position is executed (step S613). In the switching processing, the switching piece 67 is displaced from the retracted position to the guiding position by stopping the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 68 of the branch prize winning device 37. Thereafter, “1” is set to the switching completion flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S614). The switching completion flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify that the switching of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position has been completed.

  In the normal power operation process, when both “1” are set in both the opening completion flag and the switching completion flag of the RAM 114 (step S615: YES), the value of the normal power counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”. (Step S616). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal map / electric power control process (FIG. 19) is the normal map change start process (step S305). In step S616, the opening completion flag and the switching completion flag are cleared to “0”. As a result of clearing the value of the ordinary power counter to “0” on the condition that both the opening end flag and the switching completion flag are set to “1”, the winning in the through winning portion 36 was triggered. The branch winning device 37 is controlled to be opened and closed. In the current opening / closing control, the transition from the open state to the closed state of the branch winning device 37 is completed, and the arrangement of the switching piece 67 from the retracted position to the guiding position is completed. That's it.

<Control processing of first special figure winning device 33>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the control process of the first special figure winning device 33 executed in step S308 in the ordinary map / electric power control process (FIG. 19).

  When the first special figure winning device 33 is not in the accepting state (step S701: NO), on condition that a game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S702: YES). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S703).

  When the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S703: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the current detection of the game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b is normal. “2” is set in the first special figure winning counter (step S704). The first special figure winning counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of winning game balls required for switching the first special figure winning device 33 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state. If “1” is set in the first special figure winning counter in step S704, and the first special figure winning apparatus 33 is in the accepting state, two games are given to the first special figure winning apparatus 33. When the ball wins, the first special figure winning device 33 enters a non-accepting state. Thereafter, an acceptance start process of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed (step S705). In the acceptance start process, the output of the drive signal to the first special figure winning drive unit 56a is started, whereby the first special figure winning device 33 is set to the receiving state. When the first special figure winning device 33 is set to the acceptance state, “1” is set to the first special figure side acceptance state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can identify whether or not the first special figure winning device 33 is in the acceptance state by checking whether or not “1” is set in the first special figure side acceptance state flag. It becomes.

  On the other hand, in step S703, when the value of the monitoring period counter in the RAM 114 is “0”, that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the opportunity prize has been completed, detection of the current game ball by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. Means that is not legitimate. Therefore, after an abnormality notification command is set as a transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S706), an infinite loop is entered. The sound emission control device 121 receives the abnormality notification command, and executes processing for causing abnormality notification to be executed in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Thereby, it is notified that abnormality detection has occurred in the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. Moreover, execution of the process for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is prevented by entering the infinite loop. This infinite loop state is canceled by executing step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

  If the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state (step S701: YES), it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the first special figure winning device 33 (step S707). If a winning has occurred in the first special figure winning device 33 (step S707: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special figure winning counter in the RAM 114 (step S708). Then, when the value of the first special figure winning counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S709: YES), the reception completion processing of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed (step S710). In the acceptance completion process, the first special figure winning device 33 is set to a non-accepting state by stopping the output of the driving signal to the first special figure winning driving unit 56a. When the first special figure winning device 33 is set to the non-accepting state, the first special figure side receiving state flag in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”.

<Control processing of second special figure winning device 34>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a control process of the second special figure winning device 34 executed in step S309 in the ordinary map / electric power control process (FIG. 19).

  When the second special figure winning device 34 is not in the accepting state (step S801: NO), on condition that a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S802: YES). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the monitoring period counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S803).

  When the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is being measured (step S803: YES), it is provided in the RAM 114 because it means that the current detection of the game ball by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is normal. “2” is set in the second special figure winning counter (step S804). The second special figure winning counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining winning number of game balls necessary for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the accepting state to the non-accepting state. When “2” is set in the second special figure winning counter in step S804, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in an acceptance state, two games are given to the second special figure winning device 34. When the ball wins, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Thereafter, an acceptance start process of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S805). In the acceptance start process, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is started, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is set to the receiving state. When the second special figure winning device 34 is set to the acceptance state, “2” is set to the second special figure side acceptance state flag provided in the RAM 114. The MPU 112 can identify whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is in the acceptance state by checking whether or not “1” is set in the second special figure side acceptance state flag. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the value of the monitoring period counter in the RAM 114 is “0” in step S803, that is, when the measurement of the monitoring period of the opportunity prize is completed, the detection of the current game ball by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is detected. Means that is not legitimate. Therefore, after an abnormality notification command is set as a transmission target to the sound emission control device 121 (step S806), an infinite loop is entered. The sound emission control device 121 receives the abnormality notification command, and executes processing for causing abnormality notification to be executed in at least one of the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Thereby, it is notified that abnormality detection has occurred in the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. Moreover, execution of the process for advancing the game in the MPU 112 is prevented by entering the infinite loop. This infinite loop state is canceled by executing step S108 in the main process (FIG. 17).

  When the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S807). When a winning is made to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S807: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure winning counter in the RAM 114 (step S808). Then, when the value of the second special figure winning counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S809: YES), the reception completion processing of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S810). In the acceptance end process, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is stopped, so that the second special figure winning device 34 is set to the non-accepting state. When the second special figure winning device 34 is set to the non-accepting state, the second special figure side receiving state flag in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0”.

<Winning monitoring process>
Here, the winning detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning portion 36 (step S901: YES), the condition is that the value of the normal power counter in the RAM 114 is “0” (step S902: YES). ), “1” is set to the through winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S903). As a result, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is invalidated in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being executed in the normal display portion 46 and the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is being executed. In addition, in step S402 in the normal figure change start process (FIG. 20), the MPU 112 determines whether or not a winning in the through winning portion 36 has occurred by determining whether or not “1” is set in the through winning flag. Determine whether or not. In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the through winning flag is cleared to “0” even if the processing in step S402 and subsequent steps is not executed. Thereby, when any of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is in the accepting state, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is invalidated. The through winning flag is also cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S402. Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 36a of the through winning portion 36, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37 (step S904: YES), the value of the three winning ball counter provided in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S905). The three prize ball counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of transmissions of the three prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 107 to pay out three game balls. If the value of the three prize ball counter is 1 or more when the transmission is possible, one three prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 107 and the value of the three prize ball counter is decremented by one. Is done. Thereafter, “1” is set to the branch winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S906). The MPU 112 determines whether or not a winning to the branch winning device 37 has occurred by determining whether or not the branch winning flag is set to “1” in step S602 in the normal power operation process (FIG. 22). Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the branch winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  When one game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b of the branch winning device 37 (step S907: YES), “1” is set to a first opportunity prize flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S908). . The MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the first opportunity prize flag in step S702 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special figure prize winning device 33, whereby the first opportunity detection sensor 66b. It is determined whether or not a game ball is detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the first opportunity prize flag is cleared to “0”. Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, the process for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c of the branch winning device 37 (step S909: YES), “1” is set to the second opportunity winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S910). . The MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the second opportunity prize flag in step S802 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special figure prize winning device 34, whereby the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. It is determined whether or not a game ball is detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the second opportunity prize flag is cleared to “0”. Incidentally, even if one game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c, the processing for executing the payout of the game ball is not executed.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 32a of the first special figure normal winning section 32 (step S911: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S905). S912). As a result, processing for executing payout of three game balls is executed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the first special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S913). In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26), by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first special figure winning flag, the first special figure winning part 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 is determined. It is determined whether or not a single game ball has been won. Incidentally, when the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26) executes the process corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33, the first special figure Clear the figure winning flag “0”.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the first special figure winning device 33 (step S914: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S915). ). As a result, processing for executing payout of three game balls is executed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the first winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S916), and “1” is set to the first special figure winning flag in the RAM 114 (step S917). The first special figure winning flag is as described above. In step S707 in the control process (FIG. 23) of the first special figure winning device 33, the MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the first winning flag, thereby the first special figure winning device 33. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the first winning flag is cleared to “0”.

  When one game ball is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34 (step S918: YES), the value of the three prize ball counters in the RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as in step S905 (step S919). ). As a result, processing for executing payout of three game balls is executed. Thereafter, “1” is set to the second winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S920), and “1” is set to the second special figure winning flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S921). In step S807 in the control process (FIG. 24) of the second special figure winning device 34, the MPU 112 determines whether or not “1” is set in the second winning flag, whereby the second special figure winning device 34. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the second winning flag is cleared to “0”. Further, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second special figure winning flag, and thereby one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is determined. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred. Incidentally, the second special figure winning flag is cleared to “0” when the processing corresponding to the winning of one game ball to the second special figure winning device 34 is executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26). .

  In the winning detection process, other processes are executed in addition to the processes described above (step S922). In the other processing, when a winning to the general winning portion 31 has occurred, processing corresponding to the number of game balls to be paid out is executed, and the detection sensor 35c of the special electric prize winning device 35 is applied. If a single game ball is detected, a process is executed to pay out the corresponding number of game balls.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, first, a hold information acquisition process is executed (step S1001). In the holding information acquisition process, when “1” is set in the first special figure winning flag of the RAM 114, it is determined that a winning to the first special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33 has occurred. To do. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, four) of the hold information is not stored in the first special figure reservation area 133, the numerical values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 The information is stored in the first area among the empty areas 133a to 133d of the first special figure reservation area 133. Further, in the hold information acquisition process, when “1” is set in the second special figure winning flag of the RAM 114, it is determined that a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 has occurred. In this case, if the upper limit number (specifically, four) of the hold information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the numerical values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 The information is stored in the first area among the empty areas 134a to 134d of the second special figure reservation area 134.

  After that, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1002), and the special figure special electric address table is read from the ROM 113 (step S1003). And the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electricity counter is acquired from the special figure special electricity address table (step S1004).

  The special figure special electric control process includes a special figure change start process (step S1006) for starting an effect for game times, a special figure changing process (step S1007) for advancing the effect for game times, A special figure finalizing process (step S1008) for ending the effect for the game round, a special electric start process (step S1009) for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and the special electric prize winning device 35 being opened. Special electric power opening process for controlling (step 1010), special electric power closing process for controlling the closed state of special electric prize winning device 35 (step S1011), opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end Special electric power end processing (step S1012) for controlling the transition of the gaming state is set. In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-described plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special electric counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set. The special figure special power counter is the special figure special electric power control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information stored at present is finished. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. Note that the special figure special electricity counter is set to “0” as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S1004, in step S1005, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1004 is executed. Specifically, if the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “0”, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process in step S1006. In the special figure change start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is stored on hold, and the game times in which the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 and the special figure display units 45a and 45b are started. Execute the process for Details thereof will be described later.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”, the process jumps to the special figure changing process of step S1007. In the special figure changing process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is during the game continuation display period and before the final stop display. A process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the special figure display units 45a and 45b to be displayed is executed. By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, after executing the above-described regular change processing, The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the special figure finalizing process. Update to a compatible one.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process in step S1008. In the special figure determination process, the final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121 in order to display the stop result of the current game time on the symbol display device 41 as a final stop display, and the variable display target is displayed in the current game time. The display mode of the picture in the special figure display sections 45a and 45b is set as a display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. In the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the period during which the final stop is displayed has elapsed. If the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. If the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the mode transition processing is executed. Incidentally, instead of waiting in the special figure finalizing process until the final stop display period elapses, the special figure finalizing process is terminated when the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the final stop display is started, the special figure determination process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period of the final stop display elapses. In addition, when the period during which the final stop is displayed has passed, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is cleared to “0” in the situation where the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. Then, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the one corresponding to the special electricity start process.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S1009. In the special electricity start process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. Thereby, an opening effect is started in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special figure special power control process is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start process to the one corresponding to the special power open process. .

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “4”, the process jumps to the special electricity release process in step S1010. In the special electric release opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. At the start of one round game, the special prize winning device 35 is opened. If the end condition of the round game is not satisfied, the process is not waited for in the special power release process, but the special power release process is terminated after executing the process for monitoring the completion of the end condition. When the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric power open process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closed process. Update.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”, the process jumps to the special electricity closing process in step S1011. In the special electricity closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In this case, the special electric prize winning device 35 is closed. Further, in the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. When the interval period has not elapsed, this special electric power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is started each time the special figure special electric control process is started until the period elapses. In addition, when the interval period has elapsed, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric current closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric current opening process. To do. On the other hand, in the special power shut-off process for the last round game, after executing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power shut-off process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination processing.

  If the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, the process jumps to the special electricity termination process in step S1012. In the special electric power end process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. Thereby, the ending effect is started in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated instead of waiting in the special electric power end processing. Therefore, after the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power end process is started every time the special figure special electric control process is started until the ending period elapses. In addition, when the ending period has elapsed, after executing the game state transition process, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric power end process. Update to the one corresponding to the special figure change start process.

  In the game state transition process, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a low-accuracy response result, the low probability that the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode A process for setting the gaming state to the state is executed. In addition, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the first high-accuracy response result, the first lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. A process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed. In addition, if the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the second high-accuracy response result, the second lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. A process for setting the gaming state to the high probability state is executed.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing (step S1006).

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed on the condition that the hold information is stored in either the first special figure hold area 133 or the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1101: YES). (Step S1102). In the data setting process, when the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the second special figure hold regardless of whether the hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 133 or not. The holding information stored in the first area 134a of the area 134 is moved to the execution area 135 for special drawing. Then, the process which shifts the hold information stored in each area 134a-134d of the 2nd special figure reservation area 134 is performed. In this data shift processing, the data in the first area 134a is cleared, and the second area 134b → the first area 134a, the third area 134c → the second area 134b, the fourth area 134d → the third area 134c, and so on. Data in the area is shifted. Further, in the data setting process, when the holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the holding information is stored in the first special figure holding area 133, the first special figure holding area The holding information stored in the first area 133a of 133 is moved to the execution area 135 for special drawing. Then, the process which shifts the hold information stored in each area 133a-133d of the 1st special figure reservation area 133 is performed. In this data shift process, the data in the first area 133a is cleared, and the second area 133b → the first area 133a, the third area 133c → the second area 133b, the fourth area 133d → the third area 133c, and so on. Data in the area is shifted. If the hold information is stored in both the first special figure holding area 133 and the second special figure holding area 134 by executing the data setting process as described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is stored. The hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 corresponding to is given priority as a game start target.

  Thereafter, the validity determination process is executed (step S1103). In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the ROM 113, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure, that is, the hit random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the above matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 135 for the special figure is referred to by referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode provided in the ROM 113. It is determined whether or not it matches with the jackpot value information for probability.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S1104). If the result is a big win (step S1104: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S1105). In the allocation determination process, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133, the distribution table for the first special figure (FIG. 14A) is referred to. Thus, which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the information stored in the special chart execution area 135 is specified. On the other hand, in the allocation determination process, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the distribution table for the second special figure (FIG. 14B) is used. Referring to the information stored in the special drawing execution area 135, the jackpot result corresponding to the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S1106). Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b that are subject to variable display in the current game round is stored for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 113 in advance. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. In the jackpot result stop result table, information on the pattern modes to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S1107). Specifically, the RAM 114 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S1107, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, it corresponds to the distribution determination result of step S1105. “1” is set for the flag.

  On the other hand, when it is not the big win result (step S1104: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S1108). Specifically, information about the pattern form that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 45a and 45b that are subject to variable display in the current game round is stored in advance in the ROM 113 for stop results. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 114. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S1107 and S1108, a display continuation period acquisition process is executed (step S1109). In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current start of change corresponds to the jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. If the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special chart execution area 135 is not the result of any jackpot, but the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display occurs. judge. When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. To do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table is different from the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table.

  Thereafter, the display duration information acquired in step S1109 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter provided in the RAM 114 (step S1110). The value set in the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (FIG. 18) is executed.

  Thereafter, the change command and the type command are set as transmission targets to the sound emission control device 121 (step S1111). The change command includes information on the display duration. Here, as described above, the display duration acquired with reference to the non-reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration obtained with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table, Even if the information on the presence / absence of reach has not been included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 121 can specify the presence / absence of reach from the information on the display duration. The type command includes game result information. By transmitting the variation command and the type command to the sound emission control device 121, the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 start an effect for game times. This effect for game times is executed over the display continuation period acquired in step S1109.

  After that, the display of the variation of the picture in the special figure display portions 45a and 45b which are the subject of variation display of the current game times is started (step S1112). In this case, when the current game time is triggered by the hold information in the first special figure reservation area 133, the variable display of the pattern in the first special figure display unit 45a is started, and the current game time is the second special figure. When the hold information in the hold area 134 is triggered, the variable display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 45b is started. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1113). Thereby, the process to be executed in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 26) becomes the special figure changing process (step S1007).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Not only is the game ball paid out when the game ball enters the branch winning device 37, but the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 is located downstream of the first derivation region 65c and the second derivation region. A privilege different from the payout of game balls is given by flowing into any of 65d. As a result, a plurality of benefits are given when the game ball enters the branch winning device 37, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball entering the branch winning device 37. Become. In this case, the branch winning device 37 detects branch winnings upstream of the switching piece 67 that guides the game ball flowing down the branch passage 65 to either the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d. A sensor 66a is provided, and when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a, the payout of the game ball is executed, and further, the first derivation area 65c or the second derivation downstream of the switching piece 67 is performed. When a game ball flows into the area 65d, a privilege different from the payout of the game ball is given. Thereby, even if the passage length dimension of the passage area downstream from the first lead-out area 65c or the second lead-out area 65d is increased, the game ball is paid out in response to the game ball entering the branch winning device 37. This can be done early. Therefore, the passage configuration of the passage area that leads to the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c or the second derivation area 65d while allowing the game balls to be paid out at an early stage in response to the game balls entering the branch winning device 37. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of design.

  When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, the first special figure winning device 33 that generates an opportunity to acquire the hold information that is the execution target of the success / failure determination process is provided. When the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation area 65d in the acceptance state, the second special figure winning device 34 that causes an opportunity to acquire the hold information that is the execution target of the success / failure determination process is generated. Will be accepted. Then, the second special determination process is executed more than the case where the success / failure determination process is executed for the hold information (hereinafter also referred to as the first hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the first special figure winning device 33. It is a configuration that is more advantageous to the player when the success / failure determination process is executed for the hold information (hereinafter also referred to as second hold information) acquired when the game ball enters the figure winning device 34. is there. As a result, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the branch prize winning device 37 will be guided to the second derivation area 65d, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 surely flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, while in the second high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37. Surely flows into the second lead-out region 65d. As a result, it is possible to create a state where game balls easily flow into the first derivation region 65c and a state where game balls easily flow into the second derivation region 65d.

  In addition, when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c, the first special figure winning device 33 that triggers the acquisition of the first hold information enters the acceptance state, and the game sphere enters the second derivation area 65d. In the case of the inflow, the second special figure winning device 34, which becomes an opportunity for acquiring the second hold information, is in a receiving state. Then, as described above, the player is more advantageous when the second hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process than when the first hold information is the target of the determination process. Therefore, the player not only expects to be in any high probability state, but also expects to be in the second high probability state rather than the first high probability state. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be made stepwise, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the configuration in which the through winning part 36 and the branch winning device 37 are provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA, the game ball is supplied to a position upstream of the through winning part 36 and the branch winning apparatus 37 in the right area PA3. A first distribution mechanism 71 and a second distribution mechanism 72 that sequentially change the distribution direction when triggered by this are provided. The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided on the upstream side of the second distribution mechanism 72, and the game balls distributed when the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the predetermined distribution direction are the second distribution mechanism 72. To be supplied. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a state where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the first distribution state, a game is played toward the through winning portion 36. When a ball is supplied and a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in the second distribution state, the ball is directed toward the branch entrance 61. Gaming balls are supplied. Accordingly, it is possible to supply the game ball toward the through winning portion 36 by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and to the branch entrance 61. It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the direction. In addition, by appropriately designing the configurations of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the frequency at which game balls are supplied toward the through winning portion 36 and the game balls are supplied toward the branch entrance 61. The frequency can be set to a frequency desired by the designer. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the branch entrance 61 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball is supplied to the through winning portion 36, and the game ball has entered the through winning portion 36. Based on this, when the branch winning device 37 is opened, it is possible to reliably supply the game ball to the branch winning device 37 that is in the opened state.

  When nine game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round. Thereby, by allowing the game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

  Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 can enter the through winning portion 36 and the branch winning device 37. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 to a desired frequency.

  Three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the three distribution balls to the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are directed toward the branch entrance 61. Sorted. Thereby, it is possible to secure a period from when a game ball enters the through winning unit 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37. Therefore, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the game ball having entered the through winning portion 36, the gaming ball is surely supplied to the branch winning device 37 that is in the open state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period until the branch winning device 37 is opened when the game ball enters the through winning portion 36.

  The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 change from the state in which the game balls are distributed toward the through winning portion 36 to the state in which the game balls are distributed toward the branch winning device 37. The game balls are distributed in different distribution directions. Thus, using a period in which the game balls are distributed toward a different side from the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37, the gaming balls enter the through winning unit 36 and then enter the branch winning device 37. It is possible to secure a certain period of time as a period until the is supplied.

  Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the through winning portion 36, the display of symbol variation is executed in the normal display portion 46, and when the variation display of the symbol is completed, the branch winning device 37 is opened. In this configuration, as described above, a certain period is secured from the time when the game ball enters the through winning unit 36 to the time when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning unit 37, so that the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36. In the case where the game ball is surely supplied to the branch winning device 37 in the open state when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on having entered the ball, the branch winning device 37 It is possible to secure a period during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the general-purpose display unit 46 before the state is opened.

  In the first high probability state and the second high probability state, when the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the branch winning device is supplied after the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36. The change display of the pattern is performed on the general-purpose display unit 46 for a specific period equal to or less than the period required until the game ball is supplied to 37. Thereby, in the situation where game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism. When the game balls distributed by 72 enter the through winning portion 36, the game balls to be distributed to the branch winning device 37 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the branch entrance 61. It becomes possible to make the said branch prize-winning device 37 be in an open state before reaching.

  On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the branch winning device 37 is opened based on the game ball entering the through winning portion 36, the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle. Even when the game is supplied to the branch winning device 37, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 has already been completed and the branch winning device 37 is closed. Thereby, even if the branch winning device 37 can be in an open state in a low probability state, it is substantially impossible for a game ball to enter the branch winning device 37. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantages of the first high probability state and the second high probability state.

  In any of the first high probability state and the second high probability state, the game balls distributed to the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are 3 in the shortest firing cycle. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after the ball enter the branch winning device 37 that is in an open state, while the game balls that have entered the branch winning device 37 are reliably in the first high probability state. The opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is performed so that the game ball flowing into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and entering the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state surely flows into the second derivation region 65d. The start timing and the passage switching timing by the switching piece 67 are set. As a result, while the operation modes of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the same, the game ball is supplied to the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c in the first high probability state, and the second high In the probability state, the game ball can be supplied to the second derivation region 65d. Further, the first derivation is performed in the first high probability state while the number of game balls required from when the game ball is supplied to the through winning unit 36 to when the game ball is supplied to the branch winning device 37 is a common number. It is possible to supply the game ball to the downstream side of the region 65c and supply the game ball to the second derivation region 65d in the second high probability state.

  In the configuration in which the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction in the right region PA3, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the third distribution mechanism. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the state of the distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34. Thus, by performing a launch operation so that the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls are supplied to each of the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 in a predetermined order. In addition, the game balls can be supplied to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 according to the predetermined order.

  In particular, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction, and the first special figure winning device 33 existing upstream is in a non-accepting state. The game balls that have flowed into the installation area flow down toward the second special figure winning device 34. Accordingly, even if the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are not individually assigned to the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34, respectively, It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the receiving state of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

  When the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the juxtaposed regions of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are A special number or more of game balls are supplied to the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 before the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36, and the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the receiving state. In such a case, a special number of game balls enter to return to the non-acceptance state. Thus, when the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36 after the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state. It becomes possible, and in the situation where the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 are in the non-accepting state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the through winning portion 36.

  The branch winning device 37 is provided at a position vertically below the second distribution mechanism 72. Accordingly, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the branch winning device 37 that is in an open state upon entering the through winning portion 36. Therefore, the movement of the game balls distributed to the branch winning device 37 by the second distribution mechanism 72 is not limited even though the branch winning device 37 is opened due to the ball entering the through winning portion 36. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the branch winning device 37 is in a closed state before the branch winning device 37 is disturbed on the way and the ball entering the branch winning device 37 is generated.

<Second Embodiment>
In the said 1st Embodiment, the execution mode of the display control of the general map display part 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37 differ uniquely in a 1st high probability state and a 2nd high probability state. However, in this embodiment, these execution modes are not uniquely different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the universal change start process in this embodiment.

  In steps S1201 to S1205, the same processes as those in steps S401 to S405 of the common map change start process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the situation where acceptance control is not executed for both the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1201: NO), a winning to the through winning portion 36 has occurred. (Step S1202: YES), if the first high probability state (Step S1203 and Step S1206: YES), the first high probability state induction lottery table is read from the ROM 113 (Step S1207), the second high probability state If this is the case (step S1203: YES, step S1206: NO), the guidance lottery table in the second high probability state is read from the ROM 113 (step S1208). When the process of step S1207 or step S1208 is executed, a guidance lottery process is executed (step S1209).

  In the present embodiment, the combination of the execution mode of the display control of the general-purpose display unit 46 and the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is set to a type that allows winning to the first opportunity detection sensor 66b, and It is determined by the guidance lottery process which of the types that enables winning to the two opportunity detection sensor 66c is selected. In this case, the type of the guidance lottery table referred to in the guidance lottery process is different between the first high probability state and the second high probability state. Specifically, in the first lottery state guidance lottery table, the probability that the combination of the above execution modes (hereinafter also referred to as the first guidance mode) that enables winning to the first opportunity detection sensor 66b is selected. Is set to 80%, the probability that the combination of the above execution modes (hereinafter also referred to as the second guidance mode) that enables winning to the second opportunity detection sensor 66c is selected is 20%. Is set. In the second lottery state guidance lottery table, the probability that the first guidance mode is selected is set to 20%, whereas the probability that the second guidance mode is selected is set to 80%. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to give the second special figure winning device 34 an opportunity to enter the accepting state even in the first high probability state, and also in the first special figure winning device 33 even in the second high probability state. Can be given an opportunity to become accepted.

  In addition, while having a configuration in which the situation where the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state and the situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state can be generated in any high probability state, In the first high probability state, the first special figure winning device 33 is more likely to be accepted than the second special figure winning device 34, and in the second high probability state, the second special figure is higher than the first special figure winning device 33. There is a high probability that the winning device 34 is in the accepting state. Furthermore, the probability that the first special figure winning device 33 will be in the acceptance state is higher in the first high probability state than in the second high probability state, and the probability that the second special figure winning device 34 will be in the acceptance state is the first. The second high probability state is higher than the one high probability state. This makes it possible to give a difference between the first high probability state and the second high probability state with respect to the types of special figure winning devices 33 and 34 that are likely to generate a winning opportunity.

  In the guided lottery process, numerical information of a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 114 is acquired. Then, the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter is checked against the guidance lottery table that is currently read out of the first lottery guidance lottery table and the second high probability state guidance lottery table. Then, either the first guidance mode or the second guidance mode is selected.

  When the first guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: YES), numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the general map fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 as the first guidance fluctuation display period. Then, “1” is set to the first guide flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1211). As a result, the execution mode of the variable display period of the design variable display in the normal map display unit 46 and the subsequent opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is the mode in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. . On the other hand, when the second guidance mode is selected by the guidance lottery process (step S1210: NO), numerical information corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set as the second guidance variation display period in the normal map variation measurement counter of the RAM 114. At the same time, the first guidance flag in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1212). Thereby, the execution mode of the variable display period of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 and the subsequent opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 becomes the mode in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment. .

  After executing any one of the processes of step S1205, step S1211, and step S1212, the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started (step S1213). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ordinary power counter (step S1214). As a result, the execution target of the normal map power control process (FIG. 19) is the normal map change process (step S306).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map change in the present embodiment.

  In steps S1301 to S1306, the same processing as that in steps S501 to S506 of the normal change processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed.

  When it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the general map display unit 46 (step S1301: YES), and any one of the high probability states (step S1303: YES), the first guidance flag in the RAM 114 is set to “ By determining whether or not “1” is set, it is determined whether or not the first guidance mode has been selected in the guidance lottery process in the normal map change start process (FIG. 27) (step S1307). If “1” is set in the first guidance flag (step S1307: YES), “1” is set in the normal power release count counter of the RAM 114, and the long open period is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. The numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set (step S1308). Thereby, the execution mode of the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37 is the mode in the case of the first high probability state in the first embodiment. If “1” is not set in the first guide flag (step S1307: NO), “2” is set in the normal power release count counter of the RAM 114, and the short open period is set in the normal power release period counter of the RAM 114. The numerical information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set (step S1309). Thereby, the execution mode of the open / close control of the branch winning device 37 is the mode in the case of the second high probability state in the first embodiment.

  In step S1310 to step S1314, the same processing as step S510 to step S514 of the normal map change processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation area 65d even in the first high probability state, and the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. The game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c even in the second high probability state, and the first special figure winning device 33 is in the receiving state. Can happen. Thereby, in any of the first high probability state and the second high probability state, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into either the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c or the second derivation area 65d. It becomes possible to make a player pay attention to whether it will do.

  On the other hand, if the first high probability state, the probability that the game ball that entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c is higher than the probability that the game sphere enters the second derivation area 65d. In the high probability state, the probability that the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second derivation region 65d is higher than the probability that the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. Accordingly, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while ensuring that the second high probability state is more advantageous for the player than the first high probability state.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing the right area PA3 in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3, as in the first embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, the branch winning device 37, and the first distribution mechanism. 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, a first guide rail 99a, a second guide rail 99b, a third guide rail 99c, and a fourth guide rail 99d are provided. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Moreover, although the relative positional relationship of these is the same as that of the first embodiment, the position where they are collectively arranged is a position slightly lower than that of the first embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the special prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. However, in the present embodiment, the special prize winning device 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the left area PA2, it is impossible to win the special electric prize device 35. In order to generate a prize in the special electric prize apparatus 35, the right area PA3 It is necessary to perform a launch operation so that a game ball is launched toward the.

  The special electric prize winning device 35 includes a first special figure winning device 33, a second special figure winning device 34, a through winning portion 36, a branch winning device 37, a first distribution mechanism 71, a second distribution mechanism 72, and each guide rail 99a. It will be present on the upstream side of -99d. As a result, the number of obstructive members between the most upstream part of the game area PA and the special prize winning device 35 is reduced, and the special prize winning device 35 is likely to be awarded.

  The special electric prize winning device 35 exists above the first distribution mechanism 71, but the right region PA3 is not interposed between the special electric prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71 without winning the special electric prize winning device 35. A guiding portion 141 directed toward the first distribution mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b so that the game balls flowing down the are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. As a result, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric prize winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. As in the first embodiment, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are matched with the through winning portion 36 in accordance with the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72. On the side, the branch entrance 61 side of the branch winning device 37, and the side of the juxtaposed region side of each special figure winning device 33, 34.

  A special winning portion 142 is provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37. The special winning portion 142 is opened vertically upward, and the game ball that has won the special winning portion 142 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 142 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction in the same manner as the through winning portion 36. It is good also as a structure which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins the special winning portion 142, nine game balls are paid out.

  Between the special winning portion 142 and the branch entrance 61 of the branch winning device 37, a game ball that is distributed vertically downward by the second distribution mechanism 72 and guided toward the branch entrance 61 by the third guide rail 99c. A special guide rail 143 is provided to reliably guide the game balls that have not won the branch winning device 37 to the special winning unit 142. The special guide rail 143 is provided so as to pass vertically in front of the transparent cover 69 of the branch winning device 37, but is formed in the same manner as the transparent cover 69. The rolling mode of the sphere can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the transparent cover 69 and the special guide rail 143.

  The first distribution mechanism 71 of game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three game balls that have won the through prize section 36 in any high probability state but won the through prize section 36. Alternatively, when the arrival timing to the branch entrance 61 is delayed more than usual due to a delay in launch or the like, when the game ball reaches the branch entrance 61, the branch winning device 37 is already closed, and the branch winning device There is a possibility that no win to 37 will occur. In this case, in order to generate a winning in the branch winning device 37, it is necessary to generate a winning in the through winning unit 36 again. However, in order to generate a winning in the through winning unit 36 again, the first swing is required. It is necessary to supply a plurality of game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the distribution states of the distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are in a state of distributing the game balls to the through winning portion 36. As in the first embodiment, nine game balls are required from when the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36 to when the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36 next time. Therefore, if the winning to the branch winning device 37 is missed as described above, nine game balls are wasted.

  On the other hand, a game ball that has been guided toward the branch entrance 61 of the branch prize winning device 37 but has not won the branch prize winning device 37 is reliably guided to the special prize winning portion 142 by being guided by the special guide rail 143. Nine game balls are paid out when the player wins the prize and further wins the special prize winning section 142. As a result, even if the winning to the branch winning device 37 is missed as described above, the payout of nine game balls will surely occur as compensation, and it is possible to suppress the player's disadvantageous feeling. Become.

  In the configuration in which the special electric prize device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3, the game balls that are launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode but have not won the special electric prize device 35 are The first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied. In the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is set to the infrequent support mode. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode, even if a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, a winning to the branch winning device 37 does not substantially occur. In this case, by providing the special prize winning section 142 as described above, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode does not win the special electricity prize winning device 35, the first distribution Of the nine game balls supplied to the mechanism 71, one game ball wins the special winning portion 142, and the payout of nine game balls is executed. As a result, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode does not win the special electric prize device 35, it is possible to make up for that amount of game ball.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 24 showing the right area PA3 in the present embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, the right region PA3 is provided with a second special figure winning device 34, a through winning portion 36, and a first distribution mechanism 71. These configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the first special figure winning device 33, the branch winning device 37, and the second distribution mechanism 72 are not provided in the game area PA including the right area PA3. Since the first special figure winning device 33 is not provided, the first special figure provided in the lower area PA4 of the gaming area PA is the winning portion that causes the holding information to be stored in the first special figure holding area 133. Only the normal winning portion 32 is provided (see FIG. 3).

  Further, in response to the fact that the branch winning device 37 is not provided, a trigger for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-accepting state to the accepting state occurs based on winning in the through winning portion 36. Yes. In this case, when the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs, the second special figure winning device 34 is not immediately switched from the non-accepting state to the receiving state, but when the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs. When the variation display of the pattern is started in the normal figure display unit 46, and the variation display of the pattern ends, the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the fact that the first special figure winning device 33 and the branch winning device 37 are not provided, in the present embodiment, only two types of support modes, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, are set. Has been. In the high frequency support mode, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the variation display of the pattern on the general display portion 46 is performed for 0.8 seconds which is a variation display period for high support. When the change display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is completed, the second special figure winning device 34 is surely in the receiving state. The accepting state is a period longer than the shortest firing period of the game balls since one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state. When one of the conditions that 1.5 seconds as the long acceptance period set as elapses is satisfied, the process ends.

  In the low frequency support mode, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the variation display of the picture on the normal display portion 46 is performed for 0.4 seconds which is a variation display period for low support. In addition, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, an acceptance lottery process is executed, and the winning lottery process is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. In the case of winning the acceptance, the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state at the timing when the display of the variation of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is finished, but the accepting state is shorter than the shortest firing period of the game ball. If 0.1 second, which is a short acceptance period set as a short period, has elapsed, the process ends even if no prize is entered in the second special figure prize winning device 34.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a high probability state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the winning / lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The first low probability state, and the second low probability state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode are set. In the MPU 112 assignment determination process (step S1105) executed when the winning / winning determination process (step S1103) is performed in the MPU 112, when the high-accuracy response result is obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When a high probability state is obtained and a low probability correspondence result is obtained, the first low probability state is established after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. The high probability state continues until the next jackpot result. The first low probability state ends when any of the game times of 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times corresponding to the end reference number is executed without generating a jackpot result, and the second low probability state Migrate to

  Even if any of the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 133 and the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 becomes the target of the success / failure determination process, the probability that a highly accurate response result is 80 % Is constant. However, the number of round games is more than the probability of occurrence of an open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is eight when the result of the high-precision response is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 There is a higher probability that the open / close execution mode occurs 16 times. On the other hand, when a highly accurate response result is triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the round is more than the probability that the open / close execution mode with 16 round games will occur. The probability of occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode with 8 games is higher. Thereby, it is more advantageous for the player when the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 is the target of the success / failure determination process. Incidentally, in the data setting process (step S1102) of the special figure change start process (FIG. 27), the same process as that of the first embodiment is executed, so the first special figure reservation area 133 and the second special figure reservation area. In the case where the hold information is stored in both 134, the hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is given priority as a game round start target.

  In the case of a low-accuracy response result triggered by the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 133, the end reference count is 33 after the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 occurs. Transition to a certain first low probability state. On the other hand, when the result of the low-accuracy response is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, after the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is 8 occurs, the end reference number of times is Transition to the first low-probability state, which is one of 33, 55, 77, and 110 times. In this case, the selection rate of the end reference number is the same at 25%.

  In the high probability state, when the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 is triggered, either of the eight rounds of the high-accuracy response result or the low-accuracy response result is triggered. The display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the design display device 41 are rendered in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether the symbol is displayed. In addition, even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the result of low-accuracy response is triggered, it is difficult for the player to identify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode until the high-frequency support mode ends. When the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 are rendered in an impossible manner, and the high-accuracy correspondence result is used as an opportunity, the lottery mode is high until 110 game times are consumed. The effect in the display light-emitting part 18a, the speaker part 18b, and the symbol display apparatus 41 is performed in such a manner that it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether or not the mode is the probability mode. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode while the high-frequency support mode continues during the opening / closing execution mode and after the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first embodiment, the special prize winning device 35 is provided in the lower area PA4 of the game area PA. However, in the present embodiment, the special prize winning device 35 is provided in the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3. ing. In this case, even if the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down in the left area PA2, it is impossible to win the special electric prize device 35. In order to generate a prize in the special electric prize apparatus 35, the right area PA3 It is necessary to perform a launch operation so that a game ball is launched toward the.

  As in the first embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71 is configured to display the game balls supplied from above on the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71, vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first It is configured to distribute to any one of the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71, and each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → the vertically lower side of the first distribution mechanism 71 → The configuration is such that the distribution state of the game balls is sequentially changed in the order of the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71, the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71, and so on.

  Here, the manner in which the game ball is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 32 (a) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 32 (b) shows the period during which game balls are distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 32C shows a period in which game balls are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71, and FIG. 32D is a diagram in which game balls are distributed rightward by the first distribution mechanism 71. Indicates the period.

  When the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the operation with the maximum operation amount of the launch operation device 28 is continued, whereby the game ball is supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 with the shortest launch cycle. Is done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), at the t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t13, and t15 timings at regular intervals. Thus, a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71.

  Of these, at the timing t1, the timing t7, and the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 32B, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the left side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and timings t2 and t8. And at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 32 (b) and FIG. 32 (c), the first sorting mechanism 71 moves the game ball from the state in which the game balls are distributed toward the left to the vertically downward direction. It changes to the state of distribution.

  At each of the timing t3, the timing t9, and the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 32C, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the vertically lower side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates 120 °, and timings t4 and t10. And at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 32 (c) and FIG. 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 moves the game ball from the state of distributing the game balls vertically downward to the right. It changes to the state of distribution.

  At each of the timing t5 and the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 32D, the state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a state in which game balls are distributed to the right. Accordingly, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed toward the right side of the first distribution mechanism 71. In this case, when the game ball targeted for distribution collides with the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71, the ball distribution unit 83 rotates by 120 °, and timings t6 and t12 32 (b) and 32 (d), the first distribution mechanism 71 changes from a state in which game balls are distributed toward the right to a state in which game balls are distributed toward the left. To do.

  As described above, the game balls supplied to the ball distribution unit 83 of the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a rate of one in three, and one in three The ratio is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and is distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 at a ratio of one in three.

  The first distribution mechanism 71 is provided at a position downstream of the special prize winning device 35 in the right area PA3 and at a position upstream of the second special figure winning apparatus 34 and the through winning portion 36 in the right area PA3. Yes. Between the special electricity prize winning device 35 and the first distribution mechanism 71, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electricity prize winning device 35 are surely supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. A guide portion 151 directed to the first distribution mechanism 71 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. As a result, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electric prize winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. In other words, the game ball that flows into the downstream side of the first distribution mechanism 71 in the right region PA3 is reliably supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 before flowing into the downstream side.

  In the right area PA3, a first guide rail 152 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the first distribution mechanism 71 to a lower left position of the first distribution mechanism 71 is provided. Neither the second special figure winning device 34 nor the through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the first guide rail 152, and the game ball guided by the first guide rail 152 is the first one. 2 The special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 including the through winning portion 36 will flow down to the lower region PA4 without winning any winning portion provided in the right region PA3.

  The right area PA3 is provided with a second guide rail 153 for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 to a position below the first distribution mechanism 71. A second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the second guide rail 153, and the game is distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153. The ball surely wins the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state in response to winning in the through winning portion 36. The acceptance state ends when one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the acceptance period elapses and returns to the non-acceptance state. When one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34, the payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134 as in the first embodiment. Is stored.

  On the other hand, if the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the game balls distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the second guide rail 153 are the second special figure. Without winning the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 of the second special figure winning device 34 is penetrated in the vertical direction. A third guide rail 154 is provided so as to guide the game ball passing through the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 in the vertical direction further vertically downward. A special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the third guide rail 154.

  The special winning portion 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game ball that has won the special winning portion 155 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 155 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction similarly to the through winning portion 36, and the game balls won in the special winning portion 155 are directly in the game area PA. It is good also as a structure which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins the special winning portion 155, three game balls are paid out. The game balls that are distributed vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71 and are guided by the second guide rail 153 but have not won the second special figure winning device 34 are specially guided by the third guide rail 154. Make sure to win the winning part 155.

  In the right area PA3, a fourth guide rail 156 is provided for guiding the game balls distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 to a lower right position of the first distribution mechanism 71. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fourth guide rail 156, and the game ball distributed to the right of the first distribution mechanism 71 and guided by the fourth guide rail 156 is sure. Win a prize in the thru winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and a winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated when the game ball passes through the through-hole in the vertical direction. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction continues to flow down in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 flows down vertically, it is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 existing on the left side of the through winning portion 36. Never happen.

  In the configuration in which the game balls are sequentially distributed in three directions by the first distribution mechanism 71, the second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71, and the first distribution mechanism 71. Since the through winning portion 36 is provided in the lower right position of the game ball, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the order of the game balls that will win the through winning portion 36 are the second. The game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are guided to the second special figure winning device 34 in the next order without being guided to the special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to ensure a long minimum period required for the game ball to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning to the through winning portion 36 is generated. Using this secured period, it is possible to perform a variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set so that the change display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is completed and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special figure winning device 34 is completed within the secured period. Even when a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. Until the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure winning device 34 is surely received by the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to win a prize.

  The length of the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 156 from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning portion 36 is guided by the second guide rail 153 from the first distribution mechanism 71 to the second special figure winning device 34. It is set larger than the passage length dimension of the passage. When game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle, one game ball is distributed vertically downward by the first sorting mechanism 71 and then one game ball is first. The period required for sorting to the right by the sorting mechanism 71 is the same as or substantially the same as the shortest firing cycle.

  In this configuration, since the passage length dimension of the guide passage by the fourth guide rail 156 is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the guide path by the second guide rail 153, the first sorting mechanism 71 distributes the guide passage vertically downward. The time required for the game balls distributed to the right by the first distribution mechanism 71 to win the through winning portion 36 is longer than the time required for the game balls received to win the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to ensure a long time. Accordingly, it is possible to ensure a long minimum time period required for the winning to the through winning portion 36 after the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state occurs.

  The through winning portion 36 is invalidated when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. In addition, even if a winning in the second special figure winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, the MPU 112 thereafter sets the second special figure winning device 34 in a non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute this process, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the process is completed. In this case, since the shortest period required from when the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state occurs until the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs is secured long, The second special figure winning device 34 is moved until the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the two special figure winning device 34 reach the through winning portion 36. The process of setting the non-accepting state has been completed with certainty, and the transition to a situation in which winning to the through winning unit 36 is valid has been completed with certainty.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, only two types of support modes, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, are set as the support mode. However, in the high frequency support mode, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. The second special figure winning device 34 is surely placed in the receiving state after the change display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46. Here, the winning mode of the game ball in the high frequency support mode (that is, the high probability state) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows the timing at which game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, FIG. 33 (b) shows the winning timing for the through winning portion 36, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the normal display portion. FIG. 33 (d) shows a period during which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, and FIG. 33 (e) shows a winning timing for the second special figure winning device 34. Show.

  When the game operation ball 28 is continuously operated in a situation where the game ball is stored in the upper plate of the upper bulging portion 19a, the game ball can be played in the shortest shooting cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). The game area PA is supplied. In this case, when the operation amount by the player of the launch operation device 28 is the maximum operation amount, the game ball is supplied to the right region PA3, but the game ball supplied to the right region PA3 has already been described. All are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as described above. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the first distribution mechanism 71 has the shortest firing period at each of the timing t1, the timing t3, the timing t5, the timing t8, the timing t10, and the timing t12. A game ball is supplied.

  Since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36 at the timing t1, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing t1. Wins the through winning portion 36 at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the variation display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started at the timing t2. In the high-frequency support mode, the fluctuation display period of the picture on the normal display unit 46 is constant at 0.8 seconds, which is longer than the shortest firing period of the game ball and shorter than twice the shortest firing period. Yes.

  After that, at the timing t3 when the variable display of the picture is continuously displayed on the general map display unit 46, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. 33 (a). In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to the left, the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t3 is the second. The region is different from the region where the special figure winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 are provided, and is different from the region where the through winning portion 36 is provided. Therefore, the game ball flows down toward the lower area PA4 without winning any of the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning portion 36 and the special winning portion 155.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the variation display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 ends at the timing of t4. Since it is the high frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state at the timing t4 when the variation display of the picture on the general map display unit 46 is completed. This acceptance state is continued until one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the long acceptance period elapses is satisfied.

  Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. In this case, since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing of t5. The game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 33 (e). Thereafter, when the processing for returning the second special figure winning device 34 to the non-accepting state by the MPU 112 is completed, the second special figure winning device 34 is not activated at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 33 (d). Return to the acceptance state.

  Thereafter, at the timing t8 when the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 as shown in FIG. Since the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 is a distribution state in which the game balls are guided to the through winning portion 36 at the timing t8, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 at the timing t8. As shown in FIG. 33B, the through winning portion 36 is won at the timing of t9. And if a game ball is supplied to the 1st distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest discharge period, the same situation as the timing of t2-the timing of t7 will occur in the timing of t9-timing of t14.

  Due to the above configuration, in the high frequency support mode, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the second order after the game balls to be won in the through winning portion 36 are second. Even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the shortest firing cycle in the cycle of winning the special figure winning device 34, every three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 Occur. This makes it possible to efficiently generate a prize for the second special figure winning device 34 in the high-frequency support mode.

  Further, when one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34, three game balls are paid out as in the first embodiment. As a result, in the high frequency support mode, the second special figure winning device 34 is reliably generated at a rate of one out of three game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in the second special mechanism 71. When a prize is awarded to the prize winning device 34, three game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can generate a prize to the second special figure winning device 34 while not substantially reducing the ball.

  On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, the variable display period of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is fixed to 0.4 seconds. Further, even if the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state when the display of the variation of the picture in the general map display unit 46 is finished, the accepting duration in the accepting state is set to 0.1 second. In this configuration, even if a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the game supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after two game balls won in the through winning portion 36. At the timing when the ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 has already been completed, and the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, even if the second special figure winning device 34 can be in the accepting state, it is substantially impossible to win a prize for the second special figure winning device 34.

  Next, the function and effect of the special winning portion 155 provided will be described.

  A first distribution mechanism for game balls that is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after two game balls have been won in the through winning section 36, although the through winning section 36 has been won in any of the high-frequency support modes. When the arrival timing to 71 is delayed more than usual due to a delay in launching or the like, when the game ball reaches the second special figure winning device 34, the second special figure winning device 34 is already in the non-accepting state. Therefore, there is a possibility that a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 does not occur. In this case, if a prize is to be generated in the second special figure winning device 34, it is necessary to generate the winning in the through winning part 36 again. In order to generate the winning in the through winning part 36 again, It is necessary to further supply the game balls to the first distribution mechanism 71 so that the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36. Since three game balls are required from when the game ball is distributed to the through winning portion 36 until the next state when the game ball is distributed to the through winning portion 36, the second as described above. If the special figure winning device 34 is missed, the three game balls are wasted.

  On the other hand, a game ball that has been guided toward the second special figure winning device 34 but has not won the second special figure winning device 34 is guided by the third guide rail 154 so that a special winning portion is obtained. When the player wins 155 reliably and further wins the special winning section 155, three game balls are paid out. As a result, even if the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 is missed as described above, the payout of the three game balls will surely occur as compensation, thereby suppressing the player's disadvantage. Is possible.

  Further, in the configuration in which the special electric prize device 35 is provided at the boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3, a game that was launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode but did not win the special electric prize device 35. The sphere is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71. Since the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode in the opening / closing execution mode, even if a winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs in the opening / closing execution mode, the winning in the second special figure winning device 34 does not substantially occur. . In this case, since the special winning portion 155 is provided as described above, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode does not win the special electric prize device 35, the first distribution is made. Of the three game balls supplied to the mechanism 71, one game ball wins the special winning portion 155, and payout of the three game balls is executed. As a result, even if the game ball launched toward the right area PA3 in the opening / closing execution mode does not win the special electric prize device 35, it is possible to make up for that amount of game ball.

  Next, the processing configuration of the MPU 112 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the ordinary power control process in this embodiment. It should be noted that the ordinary map / electric power control process is executed in step S214 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 18).

  First, the information of the ordinary power / general electricity counter provided in the RAM 114 is read (step S1401), and the ordinary / electric power address table stored in the ROM 113 is read (step S1402). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose power counter is acquired from the general-purpose power address table (step S1403).

  In the ordinary figure power control process, the presence or absence of winning in the through winning part 36 is monitored, and the fluctuation of the usual figure for starting the display of the variation of the picture in the ordinary figure display part 46 triggered by the winning in the through winning part 36. A start process (step S1405), and a process for changing the normal figure for starting the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 when the change display of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is updated and the variable display period has elapsed. (Step S1406) and a process during normal power operation (Step S1407) for executing the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 are set. In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. A start address of a program for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter. When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. Corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process, 1 is added or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter. It should be noted that “0” is set as the initial value of the ordinary power counter.

  After executing the process of step S1403, in step S1404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S1403 is executed. More specifically, if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “0”, the process jumps to the normal-number fluctuation start process in step S1405, and if the value of the general-purpose power counter is “1” The process jumps to the normal-fluctuating process of S1406, and when the value of the normal-plot electric power counter is “2”, the process jumps to the normal-power-operating process of step S1407.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the universal change start process in the present embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not winning through the through winning portion 36 has occurred (step S1501). Here, the MPU 112 executes a monitoring process for determining whether or not a winning to the through winning unit 36 has occurred in the winning detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). It is executed on condition that the value of the electric counter is “0”. Accordingly, in the situation in which the display of the variation of the pattern is being executed in the general figure display unit 46 and the situation in which the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is being executed, the winning in the through winning unit 36 is invalidated.

  If a winning to the through winning portion 36 has occurred (step S1501: YES), it is confirmed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the flag corresponding to the high frequency support mode in the RAM 114. It is determined whether the frequency support mode is set (step S1502). If it is the low frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), an acceptance lottery process is executed (step S1503). In the acceptance lottery process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is read out to the execution area 136 for ordinary drawings. Then, by referring to the acceptance lottery table read from the ROM 113, it is grasped whether or not the numerical information read into the execution area 136 for usual use is the numerical information corresponding to the acceptance winning, and the grasped result is stored in the RAM 114. To remember. Thereafter, numerical information corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set in the usual figure fluctuation measurement counter provided in the RAM 114 as the fluctuation display period for low support (step S1504). On the other hand, if the mode is the high frequency support mode (step S1502: YES), numerical information corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in the general chart fluctuation measurement counter of the RAM 114 as the fluctuation display period for high support (step S1505). ). The value set in the universal fluctuation measurement counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the normal figure change measurement counter becomes “0” from the state of 1 or more, the MPU 112 specifies that it is the end timing of the picture change display on the normal figure display unit 46.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S1504 and S1505, the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is started (step S1506). In this case, regardless of which of the processes in step S1504 and step S1505 is performed, the form of the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46 at the start timing of the pattern variation display is the same. As a result, it is possible to start the variable display of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 46 in the same manner in any situation, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, before the display of the variation of the pattern in the general map display unit 46 is started, the display of the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed in the previous variation display time of the pattern in the general diagram display unit 46 is continued. It has become. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ordinary power counter (step S1507). As a result, the execution target of the normal map power control process (FIG. 34) is the normal map change process (step S1406).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map change in the present embodiment.

  In the normal map change process, if the value of the normal map change measurement counter in the RAM 114 is 1 or more (step S1601: NO), it means that the end timing of the pattern change display on the general map display unit 46 is not reached. Therefore, a display content update process is executed (step S1602). In the display content update process, on the condition that the display content of the general map display unit 46 is updated, the pattern displayed on the general map display unit 46 is updated to the next pattern. In this case, the update mode of the pattern is constant regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the pattern regardless of whether or not the winning lottery process is accepted in the low probability state. The update mode is constant. As a result, it is possible to update the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 in the same manner in any situation, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  If it is the end timing of the pattern change display on the normal map display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), if it is the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO), the process of step S1503 in the normal map change start process (FIG. 35) will be described. It is determined whether or not the winning lottery process is selected (step S1604). When the winning is not accepted (step S1604: NO), the value of the ordinary power counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1605). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal map / electric power control process (FIG. 34) is the normal map change start process (step S1405).

  If it is in the low frequency support mode (step S1603: NO) and the acceptance is won (step S1604: YES), the public power open period counter provided in the RAM 114 corresponds to the short acceptance period of 0.1 seconds. The numerical information to be set is set (step S1606). On the other hand, if it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 (step S1601: YES), and if it is in the high frequency support mode (step S1603: YES), the normal power open period counter of the RAM 114 is displayed. Numerical information corresponding to the long acceptance period of 1.5 seconds is set (step S1607). The public train open period counter is a counter for specifying, in the MPU 112, the longest remaining period until the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. It is. The value set in the public power release period counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Then, when the value of the public electricity open period counter becomes “0” from a state of 1 or more, it is determined that it is the end timing of the current opening round in the second special figure winning device 34.

  When one of the processes of step S1606 and step S1607 is executed, an acceptance start process of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed (step S1608). In the acceptance start process, output of a drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is started. Thereby, the 2nd special figure winning device 34 will be in an acceptance state. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the normal power counter in the RAM 114 (step S1609). Thereby, the execution target of the process in the ordinary power transmission control process (FIG. 34) is the normal power transmission operation process (step S1407).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing processing during normal power operation in the present embodiment.

  By determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701). . When no winning is made to the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power open period counter in the RAM 114 is “0”. It is determined whether or not the acceptance period of the prize winning device 34 has passed (step S1702).

  If a winning has occurred in the second special figure winning device 34 (step S1701: YES), or if the acceptance period of the second special figure winning device 34 has passed (step S1702: YES), the second special figure winning device 34 The acceptance completion process of the prize winning device 34 is executed (step S1703). In the acceptance end process, the output of the drive signal to the second special figure winning drive unit 56b is stopped. Thereby, the 2nd special figure prize-winning apparatus 34 will be in a non-receiving state. Thereafter, the value of the normal power counter in the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1704). As a result, the execution target of the process in the normal map / electric power control process (FIG. 34) is the normal map change start process (step S1405).

  FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 112. The game state transition process is executed in the special power end process of step S1012 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 26).

  If the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a highly accurate result (step S1801: YES), “1” is set to the high probability flag provided in the RAM 114 (step S1802), and the RAM 114 “1” is set to the first high-frequency support flag provided in (step S1803). The high probability flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the first high frequency support flag is a high frequency support that continues until the support mode becomes the next jackpot result. This is a flag for specifying in the MPU 112 whether or not the mode is set. By setting “1” in both the high probability flag and the first high frequency support flag, the gaming state becomes a high probability state.

  When the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-accuracy response result (step S1801: NO), the high probability flag of the RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1804) and provided in the RAM 114. “1” is set to the second high frequency support flag (step S1805). The second high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 112 whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode that continues until the game times of the end reference number are exhausted. When the value of the high probability flag is cleared to “0” and the second high frequency support flag is set to “1”, the gaming state becomes the first low probability state. Thereafter, the high-frequency execution counter setting process is executed (step S1806). In the set process, the value corresponding to the type of the low-accuracy response result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode among the 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times is stored in the high frequency execution counter provided in the RAM 114. set. The high frequency execution counter is a counter for the MPU 112 to specify the remaining number of games for which the high frequency support mode is to be continued. The value set in the high frequency execution counter is decremented by 1 every time the game is executed. When the value of the high frequency execution counter becomes “0”, the support mode is changed from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. To change.

  When the process of step S1803 or step S1806 is executed, an ending command transmission process is executed (step S1807). In the ending command transmission process, if the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-accuracy response result, an ending command in which information on the end reference count of the high-frequency support mode is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121. If the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a highly accurate response result, an ending command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 121.

  FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing display continuation period acquisition processing executed by the MPU 112. The display continuation period acquisition process is executed in step S1109 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 27).

  In the case where the current game time is the high-frequency support mode, the hold information in the second special figure reservation area 134 is the start target of the game time, and the result of the success / failure determination process is not a jackpot result (step S1901 and step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 (step S1904). When the hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 (step S1904: YES), the second special figure holding area 134 in a situation where another holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. This means that the current game is started with the hold information stored in the game. In this case, the information corresponding to the fixed short period of 1.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as the display duration information of the current game time, and the read fixed short-term information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1905). As a result, in the current game round, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 45b is performed over a fixed short period of time, and the effect for the game round in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41 is achieved. Is performed over a fixed short period.

  On the other hand, if no hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 (step S1904: NO), the second special figure holding is performed in a situation where no other holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. This means that the current game round is started with the hold information stored in the area 134 as an opportunity. In this case, the information corresponding to the fixed long period of 7.2 seconds is read from the ROM 113 as the display duration information of the current game time, and the read fixed long period information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the RAM 114. (Step S1906). Thereby, in the current game round, the variation display of the pattern in the second special figure display unit 45b is performed over a fixed long period, and the effect for the game round in the display light emitting unit 18a, the speaker unit 18b, and the symbol display device 41. Is carried out over a fixed period of time.

  That is, when the game times are executed in response to the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the high-frequency support mode, and the result of the game time determination process is not a jackpot result, The game continuation display period is a fixed short period if another hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and no other hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134. If there is a fixed long period. Thereby, in the high frequency support mode, it becomes possible to simplify the execution mode of each game time in the situation where the game time of the off-result is executed with the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 as a trigger. .

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, two or more predetermined numbers are provided in a situation where game balls are supplied toward the first sorting mechanism 71 in the shortest firing period (specifically, 0.6 seconds). Winnings to the second special figure winning device 34 occur at a rate of one (specifically three). In this case, in the situation where another hold information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, when the game time for which the second special figure display unit 45b is a variable display target is executed, the display continuation period is set. The fixed short period, which is shorter than “the shortest firing cycle × the predetermined number”. As a result, when the game times of the losing result continue in a situation where the hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the hold information of the maximum hold number is stored in the second special figure hold area 134. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a new winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs in the state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that the hold information is not acquired in spite of the winning of the second special figure winning device 34.

  In addition, when a game time in which the second special figure display unit 45b is in a variable display mode is executed in a situation in which no other hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the display continuation period is “shortest”. Is equal to or greater than “the shortest firing cycle × predetermined number × (the maximum reserved number of the second special figure holding area 134 + 1)”. Fixed long-term. As a result, in the case where the game times of the outage result are executed in a situation where the hold information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 134, the maximum special reservation is held in the second special figure reservation area 134 during the execution of the game times. The number of hold information will be stored, and the second special figure winning device 34 will be stored in the state where the maximum hold number of hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 during the execution of the game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a new winning is generated.

  In the display continuation period acquisition process, when it is the low frequency support mode (step S1901: NO), when the first special figure display unit 45a is a game time to be a variable display target (step S1902: NO), or this time When the game times are game times corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1903: YES), the corresponding display duration setting processing is executed (step S1907). In the set process, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times corresponding to the current start of change corresponds to the jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. If the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 stored in the special chart execution area 135 is not the result of any jackpot, but the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display occurs. judge. When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display continuation period corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table stored in the ROM 113. To do. Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display continuation period table is different from the display continuation period that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation period table. Thereafter, the acquired display duration information is set in the special figure special timer counter of the RAM 114. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the game times in a situation other than the situation in which the game times of the outage results are executed in response to the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible.

  Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect determination process is repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds.

  When the MPU 123 of the sound emission control device 121 has received an ending command from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2001: YES), the high frequency support mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode is continued from the ending command. The number of game times to be determined is grasped (step S2002). As already described, when the first low probability state is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode is continued 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times, and the high probability state after the opening / closing execution mode. If so, the frequent support mode will continue indefinitely until the next jackpot result occurs. Therefore, in step S2002, it is determined from the ending command which of these five types of continuation times is provided, and the information on the recognized continuation times is provided in the RAM 125 of the sound emission control device 121 as information on the actual continuation times. Set to the actual continuation counter.

  Thereafter, the information on the initial display continuation count is read from the ROM 124 of the sound emission control device 121, and the initial display continuation count information is set in the display counter provided in the RAM 125 (step S2003). The display counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 by the MPU 123. Further, the initial display continuation count is set to 11 times smaller than any actual continuation count that can be grasped in step S2002. Thereafter, the non-display continuation count is calculated by subtracting the initial display continuation count read in step S2003 from the actual continuation count grasped in step S2002, and the calculated non-display continuation count is displayed in the RAM 125. The continuation counter is set (step S2004). When the actual continuation count is infinite, information corresponding to infinity is set in the undisplayed continuation count counter.

  Thereafter, an initial display command is transmitted to the display control device 126 (step S2005). In the initial display command, information on the initial display continuation number read in step S2003 is set. When the display control device 126 receives the initial display command, the symbol display device 41 starts moving image display corresponding to the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, and as an image of the number of times of continuation of the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode. An image of the initial display continuation count is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The image of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode is continuously displayed on the symbol display device 41 even in a situation where an effect for game times is executed after the ending period ends. In addition, every time an effect for game times is started, the image is updated so that the value displayed as an image of the number of continuations in the high frequency support mode is decremented by one, and the number of continuations described later is also increased. When the value addition condition is satisfied, the image is updated so that a value corresponding to the satisfaction of the addition condition is added. The image display of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 ends when the high-frequency support mode ends and the low-frequency support mode is entered, or when a jackpot result occurs and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the effect determination process, when the change command and the type command are received as the game start command from the MPU 112 of the main control device 101 (step S2006: YES), the game start process is executed (step S2007). In the effect determination process, other processes are executed (step S2008). In other processes, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is executed when a command other than the ending command and the command for starting game times is received.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the game turn start process executed in step S2007 of the effect determination process (FIG. 39).

  First, the case where a game turn start command is received means that a new game turn has been started, so the value of the display counter in the RAM 125 is decremented by 1 (step S2101). Note that when the value of the currently displayed counter is already “0”, the state is maintained. Further, even when the information of the currently displayed counter is infinitely corresponding information, the state is maintained. When the information on the counter being displayed is information corresponding to infinity, the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result as an image of the number of times the high-frequency support mode continues in the symbol display device 41 in a high probability state. This corresponds to a situation in which an image indicating that the image is displayed is displayed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the undisplayed continuation counter in the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the displaying counter in the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102). When the value of the non-display continuation counter in the RAM 125 is 1 or more and the value of the display counter in the RAM 125 is “0” (step S2102: YES), the high-frequency support mode is in a continuous state. This means that the remaining number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode displayed on the symbol display device 41 is zero. Therefore, by setting “1” to the addition display flag provided in the RAM 125, it is possible to specify in the MPU 123 that it is necessary to perform the addition display of the number of continuations (step S2103).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, or if the process of step S2103 is executed, it is determined whether or not the display duration information set in the change command is a fixed long period (step S2104). When it is a fixed long period (step S2104: YES), on the condition that “1” is set to the addition display flag (step S2105: YES), an image of the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the symbol display device 41 The process for adding is executed.

  Specifically, first, a process for grasping the number of times of continuous display for addition is executed (step S2106). In the process of grasping the number of continued display times, if the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is less than 11, the number of continued display times is grasped as the number of continued display times. Further, when the value of the undisplayed continuation count is not infinite but 11 or more, 11 is grasped as the additional display continuation count. Further, if the value of the number of undisplayed continuations is infinite, if the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is less than 100, then 11 is grasped as the number of additional display continuations, and it should be 100 times or more. For example, information corresponding to infinity is grasped as the number of times of continuous display. Then, the information of the added display continuation count is set in the display counter of the RAM 125 (step S2107), and the value of the undisplayed continuation count counter in the RAM 125 is subtracted by the value of the additional display continuation count (step S2108). In addition, when the information of the undisplayed continuation count counter is information corresponding to infinity already, the information corresponding to the infinity is maintained regardless of the information of the additional display continuation count.

  Thereafter, an addition display corresponding process is executed (step S2109). In the addition display corresponding processing, a presentation control table corresponding to execution of addition display is read from the ROM 124 for a fixed long period. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the presentation control table, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute an effect corresponding to the execution of the addition display in the game times in a fixed long period. Is done. In addition, a command in which information indicating that the current game time corresponds to the losing result and information on the number of additional display continuations is set is transmitted to the display control device 126 for a fixed long period. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. Thereby, the effect for the game times corresponding to the result of losing is executed on the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period of time, and is displayed as an image of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. The value becomes the value of the current number of addition display continuations. In this case, when the addition display continuation count is information corresponding to infinity, an image corresponding to infinity indicating that the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result is used as the image of the high-frequency support mode continuation count. Is displayed.

  When the information of the display continuation period set in the change command is a fixed long period and “1” is not set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125 (step S2104: YES, step S2105: NO), A highlighting corresponding process is executed (step S2110). In the highlighting corresponding process, an effect corresponding to the execution of highlighting for emphasizing that the current state is the high-frequency support mode and for emphasizing the image displayed as the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode on the symbol display device 41. A control table is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b according to the table for effect control, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute an effect corresponding to the execution of the highlight display in the game times in a fixed long period. Is done. In addition, a command in which information indicating that the current game time corresponds to the result of losing and the execution information for highlighting is set is transmitted to the display control device 126 for a fixed period of time. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the content specified by the command. As a result, an effect for game play corresponding to the result of losing is executed in the symbol display device 41 for a fixed long period of time, and it is emphasized that the current state is the high-frequency support mode and high in the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 performs an effect for emphasizing the image displayed as the number of continuations of the frequency support mode.

  When the information of the display continuation period set in the change command is information for a fixed short period (step S2111: YES), a short period handling process is executed (step S2112). In the short-term handling process, an effect control table corresponding to a fixed short-term is read from the ROM 124. There is only one type of presentation control table corresponding to the fixed short-term stored in the ROM 124 in advance. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the table for effect control, the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b execute an effect for game times corresponding to a fixed short period.

  In the short-term handling process, a short-term handling command is transmitted to the display control device 126. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term response command, the display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 so that an effect for game times corresponding to the fixed short-term is executed. In the effect for game times corresponding to a fixed short-term, high-speed fluctuation of symbols is started in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the final stop period (0.2 seconds) is subtracted from the fixed short-term (1.2 seconds). The symbol variation display in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time in a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the detachment result is stopped and displayed at the timing when the period has elapsed. Then, the state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment result is stopped and displayed is maintained over the final stop period. This makes it possible to clearly indicate from the display content of the symbol display device 41 that the current game round is a result of losing even when the game round effect ends in a fixed short period. It should be noted that the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in an effect for game times corresponding to a fixed short period may be always the same, or may be changed by being determined by lottery or the like.

  In the short-term handling process, when “1” is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter in the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the undisplayed continuation count counter in the RAM 125 is decremented by 1. Then, information indicating that 1 is added to the value displayed as an image of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 is set in the short period corresponding command. When the display control device 126 receives the short-term response command, the display control device 126 not only causes the above-mentioned effects for game times to be executed, but also as an image of the number of times of continuous high-frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. 1 is added to the displayed value.

  When the information of the display continuation period set in the change command is neither a fixed long period nor a fixed short period (step S2104 and step S2111: NO), a command transmission process is executed (step S2113). In the command transmission process, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the notice display and the execution contents is executed based on the contents of the change command and the type command. Then, an effect control table corresponding to the display duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is read from the ROM 124. By controlling the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b in accordance with the table for effect control, the display for the current game is executed by the display light emitting unit 18a and the speaker unit 18b. In addition, a non-fixed command in which information corresponding to the display duration of the current game time, the game result of the current game time, and the result of the lottery process of the notice display is set is transmitted to the display control device 126. The display control device 126 controls the symbol display device 41 according to the contents designated by the non-fixed command. Thereby, the effect for the current game round is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  Further, in the command transmission process, when “1” is set in the addition display flag of the RAM 125, the display counter in the RAM 125 is incremented by 1, and the value of the undisplayed continuation count counter in the RAM 125 is decremented by 1. Then, information indicating that 1 is added to the value displayed as the image of the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 is set in the non-fixed command. When the display control device 126 receives the non-fixed command, the display control device 126 not only causes the above-mentioned effect for game times to be executed, but also displays it as an image of the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41. 1 is added to the current value.

  Next, with respect to the flow of the game when the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the high frequency support mode and the game times corresponding to the detachment result are continuous, FIG. This will be described with reference to the time chart. FIG. 41 (a) shows the winning timing to the second special figure winning device 34, and FIG. 41 (b) shows how the number of holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134 increases or decreases. 41 (c) shows the execution period of the game-use effects.

  At the timing of t1, the opening / closing execution mode ends, and it becomes a situation in which the effect for game times can be started in the high frequency support mode. In this case, since the holding information of the upper limit holding number is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 before the opening / closing execution mode is started, as shown in FIG. 41B, at the timing of t1. In the second special figure holding area 134, four pieces of holding information, which is the upper limit holding number, are stored. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), at the timing of t1, an effect for game rotation is started with the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134 as an opportunity. The game times are game times corresponding to a result of a start that is started in a situation in which hold information is separately stored in the second special figure hold area 134, and therefore the display duration of the game times is a fixed short period 1 2 seconds.

  Here, at the timing of t1, the launch of the game ball toward the right area PA3 with the shortest launch cycle is started. As described above, when the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the high frequency support mode, the ratio is one for every two or more predetermined numbers (specifically, three). Of these predetermined number of game balls, the game balls having the same firing order win the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the timing of t3, the timing of t5, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t13, the timing of t15, the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, Winning to the second special figure winning device 34 periodically occurs at each of the timing, the timing of t23, and the timing of t26. In this case, the cycle in which the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs is “shortest firing cycle × predetermined number”. Specifically, it is 1.8 seconds.

  On the other hand, as already described in the game times in which the second special figure display unit 45b is subject to variable display in a state where no other holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 in the high frequency support mode. The display duration is 1.2 seconds, which is a fixed short period shorter than “shortest firing period × predetermined number”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t4, the timing of t6, the timing of t7, the timing of t9, the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t14, and the timing of t16 As described above, game times in which the display continuation period is a fixed short period are periodically executed. Then, since this fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs, at the timing of t17, which is the timing at which ten game times are executed from the timing of t1, FIG. As shown in (b) and FIG. 41 (c), when only one piece of holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, it is the timing to start a game round triggered by the holding information. In this case, since the second special figure display unit 45b is subject to change in a situation where no other hold information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the display duration is a fixed long period. .

  In the situation where the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the high frequency support mode for the fixed long period, the second special feature is used at a rate of one for a predetermined number (specifically, three). In the configuration in which a prize is awarded to the figure winning device 34, it is equal to or more than “shortest firing cycle × predetermined number × maximum reserved number of second special figure reservation area 134” and “shortest firing cycle × predetermined number × (second It is set to 7.2 seconds, which is less than the maximum number of reservations in the special figure reservation area 134 + 1). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (a) and FIG. 41 (c), the timing of t18, the timing of t19, the timing of t20, and the timing of t21, which are the situations where game times are executed for a fixed long period, respectively. As a result of the winning of the 2 special figure winning device 34, the holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, and the holding information of the upper limit holding number is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 at the timing of t21. It becomes a state.

  Here, in the game times having a fixed long period, if the addition display condition is satisfied, the value displayed as an image of the number of times of continuation of the high frequency support mode in the symbol display device 41 is set to “11”. Is done. In this case, when the first low probability state is entered after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode is continued 33 times, 55 times, 77 times, and 110 times, all of which are “11”. Is a multiple. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value that is initially displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an image of the number of times of continuous high-frequency support mode is “11”, and is displayed every time a game time is newly started. Since the current value is decremented by 1, when the 11th game is started, the value is displayed as “0”. Further, when the launch operation is continued in a manner in which the game balls are supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 in the shortest launch cycle and each game time is a result of losing, every time 10 game times are executed. Game times for a fixed long period are executed. If the display of the number of times of the high frequency support mode continues in the game times having a fixed long period is “0”, if the high frequency support mode continues after that, the image is displayed as that image. The value is basically “11”. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display in the image of the continuation number of the high-frequency support mode is added every time the game times for a fixed long period are executed, and over a period longer than the fixed short period. It is possible to execute an effect in which the addition display is performed as an effect for continuing game times.

  Thereafter, after the timing t22, the game is started with the second special figure display unit 45b as a change start target in a state where one piece of holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Until this time, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the game times in a fixed short period are repeatedly executed (timing at t22, timing at t24, timing at t25, and timing at t27). Even in this situation, as described above, the fixed short period is shorter than the cycle in which the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs, so that it is stored in the second special figure holding area 134 as shown in FIG. The number of pending information is gradually decreasing. And, at the timing when 11 game times are executed in the fixed short period from the timing of t22, only one holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134, similarly to the timing of t17. In this situation, it is time to start game times triggered by the hold information, and game times are started for a fixed long period of time.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the configuration in which the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 are provided in the right area PA3 of the game area PA, the position upstream of the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 in the right area PA3. In addition, a first distribution mechanism 71 that sequentially changes the distribution direction in response to the supply of game balls is provided. When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a situation where the first distribution mechanism 71 is in the first distribution state, the game ball is supplied toward the through winning portion 36, When a game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 in a situation where the distribution mechanism 71 is in the second distribution state, the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Thereby, it is possible to supply the game ball toward the through winning portion 36 by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, and the second special figure. A game ball can be supplied to the winning device 34. In addition, by appropriately designing the configuration of the first distribution mechanism 71, the frequency at which game balls are supplied toward the through winning portion 36 and the frequency at which game balls are supplied toward the second special figure winning device 34 are set. Each can be set to a frequency desired by the designer. Furthermore, the game ball can be supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball was supplied to the through winning portion 36, and When the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state based on the fact that the player has entered the ball, the game ball is surely supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 that is in the accepting state. Is possible.

  When three game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 as a specific number, the distribution state of the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one round. Thereby, by allowing the game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71, it is possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

  Only the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 can enter the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36. This makes it easy to design the frequency of entering the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 to a desired frequency.

  Two game balls to be supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed to the second special figure winning device 34 after two game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36 by the first distribution mechanism 71. Thereby, it is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the through winning portion 36 until the game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state based on the game ball having entered the through winning portion 36, the gaming ball is in the second special figure winning device 34 that is in the receiving state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period until the second special figure winning device 34 enters the acceptance state when a game ball enters the through winning portion 36.

  The first distribution mechanism 71 is different from the distribution direction before the game ball is distributed to the second special figure winning device 34 from the state where the game ball is distributed toward the through winning portion 36. It will be in the state which distributes a game ball to. As a result, the second special figure after the game ball has entered the through winning part 36 using the period in which the game balls are distributed toward a different side from the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning part 36. It is possible to secure a certain period as a period until the game ball is supplied to the winning device 34.

  Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the through winning portion 36, the display of the variation of the pattern is executed in the universal display portion 46. Become. In this configuration, the through winning portion 36 is secured by securing a certain period from when the game ball enters the through winning portion 36 to when the gaming ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 as described above. When the second special figure winning device 34 enters the accepting state based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered, the game ball is reliably supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 that is in the accepting state. In this case, it is possible to secure a period during which the variable display of the symbols is executed on the general-purpose display unit 46 before the second special figure winning device 34 enters the acceptance state.

  In the high frequency support mode, when the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle, the game balls are supplied to the second special prize winning device 34 after the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36. The variation display of the pattern is performed in the general-purpose display unit 46 over a specific period equal to or less than the period required until the image is supplied. As a result, in the situation where the game balls are supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the high-frequency support mode, the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 enter the through winning portion 36. In the case of a ball, the second special figure winning device 34 receives the game ball to be distributed to the second special figure winning device 34 next by the first distribution mechanism 71 before reaching the second special figure winning device 34. It becomes possible to be in a state.

  On the other hand, in the low probability state, when the second special figure winning device 34 enters the receiving state based on the game ball having entered the through winning portion 36, the game is made to the first distribution mechanism 71 with the shortest firing cycle. Even if a ball is supplied, at the timing when a game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is already completed, and the second special figure winning device 34 is not accepted. It is in a state. Thereby, even if the second special figure winning device 34 can be in the accepting state in the low probability state, it is substantially impossible for a game ball to enter the second special figure winning device 34. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode.

  When the first distribution mechanism 71 is in a state of distributing the game balls to the second special figure winning device 34, the first distribution mechanism 71 is supplied after one game ball is supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. Is in a state in which the game balls are distributed to the through winning portion 36, and when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, one game ball enters and returns to the non-accepting state. As a result, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the game balls are supplied to the through winning portion 36 after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state. It becomes possible, and in the situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state, it is possible to make the game ball enter the through winning portion 36. In addition, it is possible to prevent useless game balls from being supplied after the game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 until the game balls are supplied to the through winning unit 36.

  The path length dimension of the fourth guide rail 156 for guiding the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to the through winning portion 36 is the second special figure winning device for the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71. 34 is set to be larger than the passage length dimension of the second guide rail 153 that guides to 34. As a result, the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 are used for the period required for the game balls distributed by the first distribution mechanism 71 to reach a position where the game balls can enter the through winning portion 36. It becomes possible to make it longer than the period required to reach the position where the 2 special figure winning device 34 can enter the ball. Therefore, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, the through special winning portion after the second special figure winning device 34 is in the non-accepting state based on the ball entering the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to supply a game ball to 36, and it is possible to generate a ball entering the through winning portion 36 in a situation where the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects only by adjusting the passage length dimensions of the second guide rail 153 and the fourth guide rail 156.

  The second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position vertically below the first distribution mechanism 71. Accordingly, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the second special figure winning device 34 that is in the accepting state when the player enters the through winning portion 36. Therefore, even though the second special figure winning device 34 enters the receiving state in response to the ball entering the through winning portion 36, the first distribution mechanism 71 distributes the second special figure winning device 34 toward the second special figure winning device 34. The occurrence of an event in which the movement of the game ball is disturbed in the middle and the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state before the second special figure winning device 34 is entered is prevented. It becomes possible.

  In the high-frequency support mode and in a situation where a plurality of pieces of hold information (hereinafter also referred to as second hold information) are stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the second hold information corresponding to the detachment result is used as an execution timing. Is executed, the game times are executed in a fixed short period shorter than the shortest pitching period in the case where a game ball enters the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, there is a possibility that a game ball will be newly entered into the second special figure winning device 34 even though the upper limit number of second holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult to generate an event that the second hold information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the second special figure winning device 34. On the other hand, in the case where another second holding information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134 and the game times are executed with the second holding information as an execution opportunity, the game times are set to the shortest input time. It is executed over a fixed long period that is greater than or equal to the product of the sphere period and the upper limit number. As a result, if the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure holding area 134, the upper limit number of second holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 134. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which the upper limit number of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134.

  There is only one fixed short period. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing information of the game time variation display period in the ROM 113. Similarly, there is only one type of fixed long term. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing information of the game time variation display period in the ROM 113.

  The fixed long period is a period equal to or longer than the product of the shortest pitching period and the upper limit number, and is less than the product of the shortest pitching period and the number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number. Thereby, when the game times are executed over a fixed long period, the upper limit number of second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 134 in the situation where the game times are being executed. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent more game balls from entering the second special figure winning device 34 than the upper limit number in the situation where the game times are being executed. Become.

  Fixed in the case where a game ball is supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 with the shortest firing period in the high-frequency support mode and the game times are repeatedly executed using the second hold information corresponding to the result of the detachment as a trigger. A situation in which a game time for a fixed long period is executed once after a game time for a short period is executed 10 times repeatedly occurs. Thus, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of game times is increased in order to prevent the situation in which the second hold information is not acquired despite the occurrence of a ball entering the second special figure winning device 34, It is possible to periodically generate a situation where the times are executed over a period of a certain length of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the production favorable accordingly.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the right area PA3 of the game area PA is different from that of the fourth embodiment. The different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 42 is a front view of the game board 24 showing the right area PA3 in an enlarged manner in the present embodiment.

  In the right area PA3, as in the fourth embodiment, a second special figure winning device 34, a special electric prize winning device 35, a through winning portion 36, and a special winning portion 155 are provided. The special electric prize winning device 35 is provided at a boundary portion between the upper area PA1 and the right area PA3 as in the fourth embodiment. In the right area PA3, a third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162 are provided at a position downstream of the special prize winning device 35.

  In each of the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162, the game balls supplied from above are placed either on the left side of these distribution mechanisms 161, 162 or vertically below these distribution mechanisms 161, 162. In addition to the distribution structure, each time one game ball is distributed, the left side of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 → the vertically lower side of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162 → the left side of the distribution mechanisms 161 and 162. The game ball distribution state is sequentially changed as follows. In this case, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 are distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 at a ratio of one to two, and the third distribution at a ratio of one to two. They are distributed vertically below the mechanism 161. The game balls supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 at a ratio of one to two, and the fourth distribution mechanism at a ratio of one to two. Sorted vertically below 162.

  The third distribution mechanism 161 is located downstream of the special prize winning device 35 in the right area PA3. In the right region PA3, the second special figure winning apparatus 34, the through winning section 36, the special winning section 155, and the fourth swing are arranged. It is provided at a position upstream from the minute mechanism 162. Between the special electricity prize winning device 35 and the third distribution mechanism 161, the game balls flowing down the right area PA 3 without winning the special electricity prize winning device 35 are surely supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. A guide portion 163 directed to the third sorting mechanism 161 is formed by a large number of nails 24b. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 without winning the special electricity winning device 35 are reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161. In other words, the game ball that flows into the downstream side of the third distribution mechanism 161 in the right region PA3 is reliably supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 before flowing into the downstream side.

  The right area PA3 is provided with a fifth guide rail 164 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 to the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. A fourth distribution mechanism 162 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the fifth guide rail 164, and the game ball is distributed to the left of the third distribution mechanism 161 and guided by the fifth guide rail 164. Is reliably supplied to the fourth distribution mechanism 162. The fifth guide rail 164 is provided so that game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 will not win the fourth distribution mechanism 162. In addition, the game balls distributed vertically below the third distribution mechanism 161 are, by a seventh guide rail 166 and an eighth guide rail 167 described later, a second special figure winning device 34, a through winning portion 36, and a special winning portion 155. Will be blocked from winning.

  The right region PA3 is provided with a sixth guide rail 165 for guiding the game balls distributed to the left of the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to the lower left position of the fourth distribution mechanism 162. A through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the sixth guide rail 165, and the game ball guided to the left by the sixth guide rail 165 is surely distributed to the left side of the fourth distribution mechanism 162. Win a prize in the thru winning section 36. As described above, the through winning portion 36 has a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and a winning in the through winning portion 36 is generated when the game ball passes through the through-hole in the vertical direction. Then, the game ball that has passed through the through hole of the through winning portion 36 in the vertical direction continues to flow down in the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA. In this case, since the game ball that has passed through the through winning portion 36 flows down vertically, it is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 and the special winning portion 155 that exist on the right side of the through winning portion 36. Never happen.

  The right region PA3 is provided with a seventh guide rail 166 for guiding the game balls distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 to a position below the fourth distribution mechanism 162. A second special figure winning device 34 is provided at a position at which the game ball is guided by the seventh guide rail 166, and the game is distributed by being vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166. The ball surely wins the second special figure winning device 34 if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. As described above, the second special figure winning device 34 is in a receiving state in response to winning in the through winning portion 36. The acceptance state ends when one of the conditions that one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34 and the acceptance period elapses and returns to the non-acceptance state. When one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34, the payout of three game balls is executed and the second special figure holding area 134 as in the fourth embodiment. Is stored.

  On the other hand, if the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the game balls distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 are the second special figure. Without winning the winning device 34, the passage portion 59a by the cover member 59 of the second special figure winning device 34 is penetrated in the vertical direction. An eighth guide rail 167 is provided so as to guide the game ball passing through the passage portion 59a of the second special figure winning device 34 in the vertical direction further vertically downward. A special winning portion 155 is provided at a position where the game ball is guided by the eighth guide rail 167.

  The special winning portion 155 is opened vertically upward, and the game ball that has won the special winning portion 155 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning portion 155 is provided in a gate shape penetrating in the vertical direction similarly to the through winning portion 36, and the game balls won in the special winning portion 155 are directly in the game area PA. It is good also as a structure which continues flowing down. When one game ball wins the special winning portion 155, three game balls are paid out. A game ball that is distributed vertically below the fourth distribution mechanism 162 and guided by the seventh guide rail 166 but has not won the second special figure winning device 34 is specially guided by the eighth guide rail 167. Make sure to win the winning part 155.

  In the configuration in which the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the third distribution mechanism 161 and the game balls are sequentially distributed in two directions by the fourth distribution mechanism 162, the fourth distribution mechanism 161 is disposed at the lower left position of the third distribution mechanism 161. When the distribution mechanism 162 is provided, the game balls are placed in the third distribution mechanism 161 in a situation where both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 distribute the game balls to the left. When supplied, the game ball is guided to the through winning portion 36, and both the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are in a distribution state in which the game balls are distributed vertically downward. In this situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning unit 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is moved to the left. The game ball is distributed to the game balls. In this situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and the third distribution mechanism 161 distributes the game ball vertically downward. At the same time, the fourth distribution mechanism 162 is in a distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the left. In this situation, when a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, the game ball is not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning unit 36, and the third distribution mechanism 161 is moved to the left. The game ball is distributed to the game balls. In this configuration, every time a game ball is supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161, a state in which the game ball is guided to the through winning portion 36 → a state in which neither the second special figure winning device 34 nor the through winning portion 36 is guided → State guided to the second special figure winning device 34 → State not guided to either the second special figure winning device 34 or the through winning part 36 → State guided to the through winning part 36 →... The state in which the sphere is guided is sequentially switched.

  In the above configuration, the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the through winning unit 36 are not guided to the second special figure winning device 34, and The game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the next order are guided to the second special figure winning device 34. As a result, it is possible to ensure a long minimum period required for the game ball to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning to the through winning portion 36 is generated. Using this secured period, it is possible to perform a variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46. In addition, the processing time is set so that the change display of the pattern on the general map display unit 46 is completed and the transition to the acceptance state of the second special figure winning device 34 is completed within the secured period. Even when a game ball is supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the shortest firing cycle, the game ball is guided to the second special figure winning device 34 after the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. Until the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, and the game ball guided to the second special figure winning device 34 is surely received by the second special figure winning device 34. It is possible to win a prize.

  The game balls supplied to the third sorting mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be guided to the second special figure winning device 34 are not guided to the through winning unit 36, and the next The game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in order are guided to the through winning portion 36. Accordingly, it is possible to ensure a long minimum time period required for the winning to the through winning portion 36 after the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state occurs. The through winning portion 36 is invalidated when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state. In addition, even if a winning in the second special figure winning device 34 is detected by the detection sensor 54 of the second special figure winning device 34, the MPU 112 thereafter sets the second special figure winning device 34 in a non-accepting state. It is necessary to execute this process, and the winning of the through winning unit 36 is invalidated until the process is completed. In this case, the shortest period required for the winning to the through winning portion 36 after the winning to the second special figure winning device 34 in the receiving state occurs is secured long, The second special figure winning device 34 is moved until the game balls supplied to the third distribution mechanism 161 in the next order of the game balls to be won in the second special figure winning device 34 reach the through winning portion 36. The process of setting the non-accepting state has been completed with certainty, and the transition to a situation in which winning to the through winning unit 36 is valid has been completed with certainty.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the first to third embodiments, in the low probability state, the winning in the through winning portion 36 may be invalidated, and the picture in the general display unit 46 is based on the winning in the through winning portion 36. However, the branch prize winning device 37 may be configured not to be in the open state although the variable display is executed. In this case, whether or not the branch winning device 37 is in the open state can be clearly different between the low probability state and the high probability state. In the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the low frequency support mode, the winning in the through winning portion 36 may be invalidated, and the pattern on the general display unit 46 is based on the winning in the through winning portion 36. However, the second special figure winning device 34 may be configured not to be in the accepting state although the variable display is executed. In this case, whether or not the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state can be clearly different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

  (2) In the first to third embodiments, in the low probability state, when a winning to the through winning unit 36 occurs, the change display of the picture on the normal display unit 46 is surely executed and the branch winning device 37 It is good also as a structure by which opening / closing control of this is performed reliably. Even in this case, the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is performed at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the branch winning device 37 by the distribution mechanisms 71 and 72 as in the first to third embodiments. By adopting a configuration in which the branch winning device 37 has already been completed and is in the closed state, it is possible to substantially prevent the winning of the branch winning device 37 in the low probability state. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the low frequency support mode, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the change display of the pattern on the normal display portion 46 is surely executed and the second special figure is displayed. It is good also as a structure by which the acceptance control of the winning device 34 is performed reliably. Even in this case, as in the fourth to fifth embodiments, the second special figure winning is performed at the timing when the game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34 by the first distribution mechanism 71. By adopting a configuration in which the acceptance control of the device 34 has already been completed and the second special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, the second special figure winning device 34 can receive a prize in the low frequency support mode. It becomes possible not to generate substantially.

  (3) In the first to third embodiments, in the high probability state, the winning / opening control of the branch winning device 37 is surely executed when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is in a high probability state, the open lottery process is executed in response to the occurrence of a prize in the through prize winning unit 36, and the branch prize winning device 37 is opened when the open lottery process is won. It is good also as composition which will be in a state. However, in order to increase the frequency at which the branch prize winning device 37 is in the open state in the high probability state, it is preferable that the probability of winning in the high probability state is higher than the probability of winning in the low probability state. In addition, although it is possible that the open win is not achieved in the high probability state, the open win may be configured with a probability of approximately 100%. In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the high-frequency support mode is configured such that the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is reliably executed when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs. Even if it is in the high frequency support mode, when the winning lottery process is executed in response to the occurrence of winning in the through winning portion 36 and the winning lottery process is performed, the second is selected. The special figure winning device 34 may be in a receiving state. However, in order to increase the frequency with which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the acceptance state in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the high frequency support mode should be higher than the probability of winning in the low frequency support mode. Is preferred. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, it may happen that the winning winning is not performed, but the winning winning may be configured with a probability of approximately 100%.

  (4) When the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37 is executed in the second high probability state in the first to third embodiments, after the opening time by the short opening period is first executed and the closing continuation period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to perform one release that lasts over an open period longer than the long open period. In this case, the timing at which the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is started is the same as that in the first to third embodiments, and the opening period is the shortest with respect to the game ball supplied to the through winning portion 36. A period in which the branch winning device 37 is maintained in the open state also at a timing when the game ball supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after three in the firing cycle reaches the branch inlet 61 of the branch winning device 37 is assumed. Thereby, in the second high probability state, by supplying the game balls with the shortest firing period to the first distribution mechanism 71, the first distribution mechanism after three game balls supplied to the through winning portion 36. The game ball supplied to 71 enters the branch winning device 37 and the game ball flows into the second lead-out area 65d. In addition, the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 after one and two game balls supplied to the through winning portion 36 are not distributed toward the branch winning device 37. Even if the winning device 37 is maintained in the open state, only the third and subsequent gaming balls will enter the branch winning device 37.

  (5) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 is not provided, and the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the second lead-out area 65d and the second Although the special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, no special benefit may be provided when it flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c. In this case, although the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 can flow into the second derivation region 65d in either the first high probability state or the second high probability state, the second high probability state is more It is good also as a structure with a high probability that a game ball will flow into the 2nd derivation | leading-out area | region 65d rather than a 1st high probability state.

  (6) In the first to third embodiments, the game ball distribution direction by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is a direction toward the through winning portion 36, a direction toward the branch entrance 61. And, it is not limited to the configuration of three directions, that is, the direction toward the juxtaposed region of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34, and may be a configuration of four or more directions. For example, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are spaced apart from each other in the lateral direction, and the game balls and the first distribution mechanism 71 are distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71. With the structure in which the game balls distributed to the right are guided to different areas, the distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is directed to the through winning portion 36. It is good also as a structure which is four directions, the direction toward the branch entrance 61, the direction toward the 1st special figure winning device 33, and the direction toward the 2nd special figure winning device 34.

  (7) In the first to third embodiments, the number of distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 are limited to the same configuration. Alternatively, the number of distribution states may be different. For example, the number of distribution states of the second distribution mechanism 72 is the same as in the first to third embodiments described above, but there are three types of left, vertical downward, and right. The number of distribution states of the mechanism 71 may be two types, left and vertically below. In this case, the number of game balls required until the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round is six.

  (8) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 may not be provided in the first to third embodiments. Even in this case, the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36 and the branch winning device 37 are arranged in the right area PA3 so as to be directed to the right area PA3. By continuing the launch operation in which the game balls are supplied, it is possible to aim for all winnings of the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the through winning unit 36, and the branch winning device 37. Become.

  (9) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c of the branch winning device 37, the first special figure winning device 33 is in a receiving state. Is a different privilege, and the bonus when the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37 may be different from that in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state. . For example, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by a player regardless of whether the game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c or the game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d. A configuration in which the number of game balls to be increased is different between when the process is executed and when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first derivation region 65c and when a game ball flows into the second derivation region 65d It is good. In this case, at least one of the number of game balls to be increased may be the same as the number of game balls to be increased when the game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a. The configuration may be smaller than the number of game balls to be increased, or may be configured to be greater than the number of game balls to be increased.

  Further, for example, when a game ball flows into the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c and a game ball is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b, the hold information is stored in the first special figure hold area 133, The game information may be stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 when the game ball flows into the second lead-out area 65d and is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c. In this case, without providing the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34, the type of holding information according to the flow-down result of the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 is obtained. It becomes possible to do.

  (10) In the first to third embodiments, when the game ball flows downstream of the first lead-out area 65c in the branch winning device 37, the first special figure winning device 33 is surely in the receiving state. Instead, the first special figure winning device 33 may be in the accepting state by winning the winning in the lottery process executed when the game ball is detected by the first trigger detecting sensor 66b. As a result, the situation in which the first special figure winning device 33 is in the accepting state is diversified. Further, when the game ball flows into the second derivation area 65d of the branch winning device 37, the second special figure winning device 34 is not surely received, but the second ball detection sensor 66c A configuration may be adopted in which the second special figure winning device 34 enters the acceptance state by winning the acceptance in the lottery process executed in response to the detection. As a result, the situation in which the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state is diversified.

  (11) In the first to third embodiments, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 is limited to a configuration in which the game ball flows into either the downstream side of the first derivation area 65c or the second derivation area 65d. It is good, and it is good also as a structure which flows in in any of three or more types of derivation | leading-out area | regions. For example, when a third special figure winning device is provided separately from the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34, and a game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 flows into the third lead-out area. May be configured such that the acceptance control of the third special figure winning device is executed. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the branching mode of the game balls in the branch winning device 37.

  (12) In the first to third embodiments, even when a game ball is detected by the branch winning detection sensor 66a of the branch winning device 37, the game ball may not be paid out. Alternatively, the game ball may be paid out for winning to the branch winning device 37 when the second opportunity detection sensor 66c detects a gaming ball.

  (13) In the first to third embodiments, the switching piece 67 is always arranged at the retracted position in the first high probability state, and the switching piece 67 is always arranged at the guidance position in the second high probability state. It is good also as composition to be. Even in this case, the game ball that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the first high probability state surely flows into the first derivation area 65c, and the game that has entered the branch winning device 37 in the second high probability state. The sphere surely flows into the second lead-out area 65d.

  (14) In the first to third embodiments, even the game balls other than the game balls distributed to the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 are the first special figure winning device 33, the second The special figure winning device 34, the through winning portion 36, and the branch winning device 37 may be configured to be able to win at least one winning portion. As a result, it is possible to diversify the paths through which winnings to the winning portion occur.

  (15) In the first to third embodiments, one game ball wins the branch winning device 37 and two game balls win one of the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. Although the game balls of the same number as the number of game balls required for one combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 to be made one turn are arranged, it is limited to this. There may be a configuration in which the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning is smaller or larger than the number of game balls required for one round. In the fourth embodiment, when one game ball wins the second special figure winning device 34, the number of game balls required for the first distribution mechanism 71 to make one rotation is calculated. Although the same number of game balls are paid out, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls required for the number of game balls to be paid out in response to winning in the second special figure winning device 34 are one round. There may be fewer or more configurations than the number.

  (16) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 are switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state by electric drive. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be performed by physical driving. For example, in order to provide a first receiving portion that can be displaced at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the downstream side of the first lead-out area 65c reliably collides, and to switch the first special figure winning device 33 from the non-receiving state to the receiving state. These members and the first receiving part are connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. When the first receiving part receives a game ball, the first receiving part is displaced, and the first special figure winning device 33 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. Further, the first special figure winning device 33 is provided with a second receiving portion at a position where the game ball won in the first special figure winning device 33 reliably collides, and two game balls are provided in the second receiving portion. In the case of receiving, the first special figure winning device 33 is switched from the accepting state to the non-accepting state because the displacement amount of the second receiving portion becomes a displacement amount corresponding to receiving two game balls. The configuration. Further, a third receiving portion that can be displaced at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second lead-out area 65d collides with certainty is provided, and a member for switching the second special figure winning device 34 from the non-receiving state to the receiving state; The third receiving part is connected using the space on the back side of the game board 24. When the third receiving part receives a game ball, the third receiving part is displaced and the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. In addition, the second special figure winning device 34 is provided with a fourth receiving portion at a position where the game ball won in the second special figure winning device 34 reliably collides, and two game balls are provided in the fourth receiving portion. When receiving, the second special figure winning device 34 is switched from the receiving state to the non-receiving state because the displacement amount of the fourth receiving portion becomes a displacement amount corresponding to receiving two game balls. The configuration. According to the above configuration, it is not necessary for the MPU 112 to execute the acceptance control of the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the special winning portion 142 is not provided at a position vertically below the branch entrance 61, but the special winning portion 142 is provided at a position vertically below the through winning portion 36. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, regardless of whether or not a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs while the combination of the respective distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one round, the special winning portion 142 is entered. Will be awarded. Therefore, when a winning to the branch winning device 37 does not occur, the combination of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one turn, and the first is made during the one turn. When the same number of game balls as the game balls supplied to the distribution mechanism 71 are paid out and a winning to the branch winning device 37 occurs, each distribution of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 is performed. During one round of the combination of states, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 during the one round are paid out.

  (18) In the fourth embodiment, the special prize winning portion 155 is not provided at a position vertically below the second special figure winning device 34, but the special prize winning portion 155 is located vertically below the through winning prize portion 36. Or it is good also as a structure provided in the position guided by the 1st guide rail 152. FIG. In this case, the winning to the special winning portion 155 occurs regardless of whether or not a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs while the distribution state of the first distributing mechanism 71 makes one round. Become. Accordingly, when no winning is made to the second special figure winning device 34, the first sorting mechanism 71 is supplied to the first sorting mechanism 71 during one round while the first sorting mechanism 71 makes one round. When the same number of game balls are paid out and a winning to the second special figure winning device 34 occurs, the first distribution mechanism 71 makes one turn while the distribution state makes one turn. In the meantime, a larger number of game balls than the game balls supplied to the first distribution mechanism 71 are paid out.

  (19) The distribution direction of the game balls by the first distribution mechanism 71 and the positional relationship between the second special figure winning device 34 and the through winning portion 36 are not limited to those in the fourth embodiment. For example, the through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where the game ball distributed to the left by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided, and the game ball distributed vertically downward is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. It is good also as a structure by which the 2nd special figure prize-winning apparatus 34 is provided in the position where the game ball distributed rightward by the position or the 1st distribution mechanism 71 is guide | induced. Further, a through winning portion 36 is provided at a position where a game ball distributed vertically downward by the first distribution mechanism 71 is guided, and the game ball distributed leftward is guided by the first distribution mechanism 71. It is good also as a structure by which the 2nd special figure prize-winning apparatus 34 is provided in the position where the game ball distributed rightward by the position or the 1st distribution mechanism 71 is guide | induced.

  (20) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, when the second special figure winning device 34 is in the accepting state, one game ball enters the second special figure winning device 34 and the second special figure winning device 34 The special figure winning device 34 is not limited to a configuration in which the special figure winning device 34 is in a non-accepting state, and two or more predetermined number of game balls enter the second special figure winning device 34 so that the second special figure winning device 34 34 may be in a non-accepting state. In this case, even if the second special figure winning device 34 is in the receiving state in a predetermined lap when the allocating state of the first allocating mechanism 71 makes one round, The condition that the 2 special figure winning device 34 is switched to the non-accepting state is established.

  (21) In the fourth to fifth embodiments described above, when the game times corresponding to the detachment result are repeatedly executed with the holding information (hereinafter also referred to as second holding information) in the second special figure holding area 134, The shortest winning period, fixed short period, and fixed long period for the second special figure winning device 34 are set so that after a fixed short period of 10 game times, the fixed long period of 1 game time is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the game times for a fixed long period are performed once after the game times for a fixed short period are performed a predetermined number of times less than 10 times, A configuration may be adopted in which the game times for the fixed long period are performed once after the game times for the fixed short period are performed more than 10 times. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the game times by a fixed long period are performed 2 times or 3 times, while the game times by a fixed short period are performed several times.

  (22) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the fixed short period is not limited to only one type, and there are a plurality of periods shorter than the shortest winning cycle for the second special figure winning device 34. It is good also as a structure which has a kind. Moreover, it is not limited to the configuration in which the fixed long period is only one type, and there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of periods that are equal to or longer than the shortest winning cycle for the second special figure winning device 34. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of game times.

  (23) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment. The pitching portion that is a target for game balls to be sorted by the sorting means such as the third sorting mechanism 161 and the fourth sorting mechanism 162 is not limited to that in the above embodiments. For example, the game balls to be distributed by the distribution means may be configured to be the general prize winning unit 31 and the special electric prize winning device 35, the first special figure normal winning part 32, the second special figure winning prize device 34, and the special electric prize winning device. The configuration may be 35.

  (24) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 in the first to third embodiments, the first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment. The distribution means such as the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162 are not limited to the configuration in which the distribution direction is changed each time one game ball is supplied to the distribution means. When the distribution state of the distribution means is a state in which game balls are distributed in a predetermined distribution direction, when two or more triggering game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution direction is different from the predetermined distribution direction. It is good also as a structure which changes to the state which distributes a game ball in the distribution direction. Further, when the game balls are distributed in a predetermined distribution direction, when two or more opportunities of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game is performed in a distribution direction different from the predetermined distribution direction. When the ball is changed to a state in which the balls are distributed and the game balls are distributed in a specific distribution direction, when a number of game balls different from the above-mentioned opportunity number are supplied to the distribution means, the specific distribution direction It is good also as a structure which changes to the state which distributes a game ball to a different distribution direction.

  (25) In the first to third embodiments, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is invalid in the situation where the acceptance control is executed for either the first special figure winning device 33 or the second special figure winning device 34. However, even when the acceptance control is being executed, the winning in the through winning portion 36 is validated, and if the winning in the through winning portion 36 occurs in this situation, it is usual. A configuration may be adopted in which the change display of the picture on the display unit 46 is started and the opening control of the branch winning device 37 is started after the display of the change of the picture. In this case, the game balls required for the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34 to switch from the receiving state to the non-receiving state are transferred to the special drawing winning devices 33 and 34. When the supply of game balls to the through winning portion 36 is performed in a state where no supply is made, it is possible to prevent waiting time until the winning to the through winning portion 36 is activated. It becomes. In the fourth to fifth embodiments, in the situation where the acceptance control is executed for the second special figure winning device 34, the winning prize to the through winning portion 36 is invalidated. However, the acceptance control is executed. Even in the situation, the winning to the through winning portion 36 is validated, and when the winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs in the situation, the display of the variation of the pattern on the normal display portion 46 is started. At the same time, the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 may be started after the change display of the pattern. In this case, the first distribution mechanism 71 is passed through in a situation where the game balls necessary for the second special figure winning device 34 to switch from the accepting state to the non-accepting state are not supplied to the second special figure winning device 34. When the game balls are supplied to the winning portion 36, it is possible to prevent a waiting time until the winning to the through winning portion 36 is validated.

  (26) In the first to third embodiments described above, the situation in which the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the universal figure display unit 46, the situation in which the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37 is executed, and the special figure winning device. In the situation where the acceptance control of 33, 34 is being executed, when a winning to the through winning portion 36 occurs, the opportunity information for the winning is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) It is good. And the situation where the change display of the picture is performed in the general figure display section 46, the situation where the opening / closing control of the branch winning device 37 is executed, and the situation where the receiving control of the special figure winning devices 33 and 34 is executed If the trigger information is held and stored in a situation that is not any of the above, the variable display of the pattern on the general-purpose display unit 46 is started by using the trigger information as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to generate many triggers for executing the opening / closing control of the branch prize winning device 37. Further, in the fourth to fifth embodiments, it is possible to see through in a situation where the change display of the pattern is performed on the universal figure display unit 46 and the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is being executed. When winning to the winning portion 36 occurs, the opportunity information for the winning may be stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. And the opportunity information is held and stored in the situation in which neither the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed on the general map display unit 46 nor the situation where the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed. In such a case, the display of the variation of the pattern in the general-purpose display unit 46 is started with the opportunity information as an opportunity. As a result, it is possible to generate many opportunities for executing the acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34.

  (27) The opening period of the branch winning device 37 may be longer or shorter than the period in the first to third embodiments. In addition, the acceptance period of the second special figure winning device 34 may be longer or shorter than the fourth to fifth embodiments.

  (28) In the first to third embodiments, the first special figure winning device 33 and the second special figure winning device 34 may be arranged upside down.

  (29) In the special electric prize winning device 35, a V winning area, a distribution member that distributes game balls to any one of the V winning area and other areas, a V winning detection sensor that detects a gaming ball flowing into the V winning area, and It is good also as a structure where the success / failure lottery mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high probability mode when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that a game ball can flow into the V winning area when a highly accurate response result is obtained, and the V winning area is input when a low accuracy response result is obtained. The opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the inflow of game balls is impossible. Further, in addition to the special electric prize winning device 35, a separate winning device provided with a V winning detection sensor is provided, and when a highly accurate response result is obtained, the opening / closing execution mode is set in such a manner that a winning to the separate winning device is possible. It is good also as a structure by which opening / closing execution mode is performed in the aspect which can be awarded to the another prize-winning apparatus, when it is performed and it becomes a low probability response result.

  (30) In the first to third embodiments, when the game trigger is detected by the first trigger detection sensor 66b and the acceptance control of the first special figure winning device 33 is executed, the first special figure winning device 33 However, the first special figure winning device 33 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening time occurs in a predetermined turn when each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one turn, and the second opening time is a predetermined turn. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces at the timing which can supply a game ball to the 1st special figure winning device 33 in the next round. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the second opportunity detection sensor 66c and acceptance control of the second special figure winning device 34 is executed, the second special figure winning device 34 is opened only once. The second special figure winning device 34 may be opened a plurality of times. In this case, the first opening time occurs in a predetermined turn when each of the distribution states of the first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72 makes one turn, and the second opening time is a predetermined turn. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces at the timing which can supply a game ball to the 2nd special figure winning device 34 in the next round.

  (31) When the high probability state is reached in each of the embodiments described above, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the high probability state continues until the next jackpot result occurs. The high probability state may be terminated when the game times are executed. In this case, even if the jackpot result does not occur, the high probability state can be shifted to the low probability state. Therefore, for example, when a jackpot result is generated with the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133, the result is either the low probability correspondence result or the high probability correspondence result, while the second special figure reservation is When a jackpot result is generated with the hold information stored in the area 134 as a trigger, it may be configured to be a highly accurate response result.

  (32) In the first to third embodiments, when the jackpot result is triggered by the hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 134, the first high-accuracy response result is not obtained. It is good also as a structure which can become a 1st highly reliable response result.

  (33) The number of prize balls in each of the above embodiments is not limited and is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls when one game ball is won in the second special figure winning device 34 is the first number. The number of winning balls may be larger or smaller than the number of winning balls when one game ball is won in the special figure normal winning unit 32 or the first special figure winning device 33. Further, the number of winning balls when one game ball is won in the first special figure normal winning unit 32 and the number of winning balls when one game ball is winning in the first special figure winning device 33 are different. It is good. In this case, the former winning ball number may be larger or smaller than the latter winning ball number.

  (34) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 101 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 126 is controlled by the sound emission control device 121 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 101 The device 126 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 121. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 121 and the display control device 126 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main control apparatus 101, and both functions of these two control apparatuses may be integrated into the main control apparatus 101. In addition, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sound emission control device 121 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 121 to the display control device 126 are arbitrary.

  (35) The device for executing the effect for game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for effect for game times is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (36) In the fourth to fifth embodiments, the first special figure reservation area 133 and the second special figure reservation area 134 are not individually provided, and the first special figure normal winning portion 32 and the second special figure are not provided. Even if a game ball enters any of the winning devices 34, the holding information may be stored in the common special figure holding area. In this case, the hold information acquired by winning the first special figure winning part 32 and the hold information acquired by winning the second special figure winning device 34 are stored separately. Therefore, regardless of the hold information, the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in the same manner.

  (37) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 is limited to a configuration in which the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 is prioritized and digested. On the contrary, the holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 133 may be digested in preference to the holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 134. Even if it is information, it is good also as a structure digested in an acquisition order.

  (38) The case where the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 133 becomes the target of the determination of the success / failure, and the case where the hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 134 becomes the target of the determination of the success / failure And it is good also as a structure where the distribution mode of a jackpot result is the same.

  (39) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is impossible for a player to replenish game balls to a pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed in a situation where the number of available game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when a game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, a game that can be used when a winning ball is generated by winning the first special figure winning device 33, the second special figure winning device 34, the branch winning device 37, the special winning units 142, 155, etc. The number of balls will increase in the data.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A predetermined entrance portion (branch entrance 61) in which game balls flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which game balls that have entered the predetermined entry portion flow down;
Predetermined detection means (branch winning detection sensor 66a) for detecting a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion;
A predetermined granting unit (a function for executing the process of step S905 in the MPU 112, the payout control device 107) for granting a privilege to a player when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detection unit;
A game ball that is provided downstream of the detection area by the predetermined detection means in the predetermined passage portion and passes through the detection area is a first area (downstream of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation). Guiding means (switching piece 67) that is guided to any one of a plurality of regions including the region 65d);
A first granting unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S704, S705, and S908 in the MPU 112) that grants the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area. When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the privilege is not only given when the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part, but also when the game ball that enters the predetermined entrance part flows into the first area. Is granted. As a result, a plurality of benefits are granted by entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance part, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game ball entering the predetermined entrance part. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined detection means provided on the upstream side of the guidance means for guiding the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion to any region, a privilege is given, and further, from the guidance means Also, when a game ball flows into the first area on the downstream side, a privilege is given. As a result, even if the passage length dimension of the predetermined passage portion continuing to the first region is increased, it is possible to give a privilege to the fact that a game ball has entered the predetermined entry portion at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the passage configuration of the predetermined passage portion that continues to the first region, while allowing a privilege to be given to the predetermined ball portion to enter the game ball at an early stage. .

  Feature A2. Even if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion does not flow into the first area, a privilege different from the privilege by the predetermined provision means is provided.

  According to the feature A2, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entry part, the privilege for the detection of the game ball by the predetermined detection means regardless of whether or not the game ball flows into the first area A privilege different from the above is granted. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion.

  Further, with the configuration of the feature A1, the predetermined detection means provided on the upstream side of the guidance position by the guidance means regardless of which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into. A privilege is awarded when a game ball is detected. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the structure for guiding to any region while giving a privilege to a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entry portion at an early stage.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the privilege granted by the predetermined granting unit is different from the privilege granted by the first granting unit.

  According to the feature A3, a plurality of types of privileges are given to the game ball entering the predetermined entrance part. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. Further, the granting of the privilege by the predetermined granting unit is performed by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection unit upstream of the guide position by the guiding unit, and the granting of the privilege by the first granting unit is based on the guidance position by the guiding unit. Is also performed when the game ball flows into the first region on the downstream side. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of benefits are provided for the game balls entering the predetermined ball-entry unit, it is possible to provide the plurality of types of privileges in stages.

Feature A4. The predetermined granting unit grants a privilege to increase the number of game balls that can be used by a player when a game ball is detected by the predetermined detection unit;
Any of the features A1 to A3, wherein when the game ball flows into the first area, the first grant unit grants a privilege different from a privilege that increases the number of game balls that a player can use. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A4, a plurality of types of benefits are given to the game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance portion. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the types of benefits to be granted. In addition, a privilege that increases the number of game balls that can be used by the player is first given by detecting the game ball by the predetermined detection means upstream of the guide position by the guide means, and then the guide position by the guide means When the game ball flows into the first area on the downstream side, a privilege different from the privilege for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is given. Thereby, it is possible to grant a plurality of types of benefits step by step while giving a privilege to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player at an early stage.

Feature A5. First variable entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33)
In any one of the features A1 to A4, the first giving means causes the first variable pitching means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, when the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance portion and flows down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable entrance means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable entry means to enter the first state will play the game while expecting that the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion will flow into the first area. . By providing the configuration of the feature A1 in the configuration, the bonus is given by the predetermined granting unit when the game ball is detected by the predetermined detection unit upstream of the guidance position by the guidance unit. Accordingly, in order to secure a period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance portion flows into the first area, the distance from the predetermined entrance portion to the guide position by the guide means is to some extent. Even if it is ensured, it becomes possible to quickly give a privilege that a game ball has entered the predetermined entrance part.

Feature A6. Second variable entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 34)
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second giving means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) is set so that the second variable pitching means enters the first state. The function of executing the processing of S910),
The gaming machine according to Feature A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable pitching means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area. The second variable entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable pitching means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guiding means, and the player is asked to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

Feature A7. A lottery process is executed based on occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable entry means, and a lottery process is executed based on occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable entry means. Lottery execution means (function to execute the processing of step S1001, step S1102 and step S1103 in the MPU 112),
In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means, the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, which is more advantageous for the player than when the lottery process is executed based on the above.

  According to the feature A7, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the second variable entry means than the game ball enters the first variable entry means. As a result, the player expects that the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance part will be guided to the second area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A8. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is the same as the first region. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that has a higher probability of flowing into different areas.

  According to the feature A8, in the first gaming state, the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion surely flows into the first area or flows into the first area is increased. This makes it possible to create a state in which game balls can easily flow into the first region.

Feature A9. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state includes a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering part is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the predetermined ball entering part. A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance part, the probability of becoming the first situation or the first situation is greater than the probability of becoming the second situation. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is also expensive.

  According to the feature A9, the predetermined entrance portion cannot or cannot enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. Thereby, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined entrance part will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined entrance part is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or is likely to become the first situation. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state and the game ball easily flows into the first region.

Feature A10. A second granting unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S804, S805, and S910 in the MPU 112) that grants the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when the game ball flows into the second area. With
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or A9, wherein the gaming machine has a higher probability of inflow.

  According to feature A10, in the first gaming state, the probability that a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or into the first region is high, while in the second gaming state, the predetermined passage portion is There is a high probability that a game ball that flows down flows into the second area or flows into the second area. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which game balls easily flow into the first region and a state in which game balls easily flow into the second region.

Feature A11. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state includes a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering part is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the predetermined ball entering part. A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance part, the probability of becoming the first situation or the first situation is greater than the probability of becoming the second situation. Is a high configuration,
In the second game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance part, the probability of becoming the second situation or the second situation is greater than the probability of becoming the first situation. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, which has a high configuration.

  According to the feature A11, the predetermined entrance portion cannot or does not enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. Thereby, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined entrance part will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined entrance part is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or is likely to become the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. Is likely to become the second situation or the second situation. As a result, the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first area, and the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state where it is easy to flow in.

Feature A12. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball entering a specific pitching portion (through winning portion 36),
In the gaming area, on the upstream side of the specific pitching portion and the predetermined pitching portion, the supplied gaming balls are any of a plurality of sort directions including a first sort direction and a second sort direction. Distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) that sequentially change the distribution direction triggered by the supply of gaming balls,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entry portion.

  According to the feature A12, the predetermined entrance portion is in the first state on the condition that at least one condition is that a game ball has entered the specific entrance portion. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined entrance part also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entrance part. In this case, a distribution unit that sequentially changes the distribution direction triggered by the supply of game balls is provided upstream of the specific ball entry unit and the predetermined ball entry unit. When the direction is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry part, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed toward the predetermined ball entry part. Is supplied. As a result, it is possible to supply the game balls toward the specific ball-in part by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, and toward the predetermined ball-in part. A game ball can be supplied. In addition, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency at which the game balls are supplied toward the specific entrance portion and the frequency at which the game balls are supplied toward the predetermined entrance portion are respectively determined by the designer. The frequency can be set. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the predetermined ball game part after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball is supplied to the specific ball game part. When at least one of the above conditions is satisfied, when the predetermined ball-entering portion is in the first state, the game ball can be reliably supplied to the predetermined ball-entry portion in the first state. .

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the allocating means, the allocating state by the allocating means makes one round.

  According to the feature A13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

  Feature A14. Only game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means The game machine according to Feature A12 or A13, characterized in that a ball can be entered into the predetermined ball entry portion.

  According to the feature A14, only the game balls distributed by the distribution means can enter the specific entrance portion and the predetermined entrance portion. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the frequency of entering the specific entrance portion and the predetermined entrance portion to a desired frequency.

  Feature A15. A feature that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of A14.

  According to the feature A15, a specific incoming ball is obtained by distributing, in the second distribution direction, the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the distribution unit in the first distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when a game ball enters the part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entry part. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state under the condition that at least one game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the predetermined ball entering part in the first state. In the case of being supplied, it is possible to secure a period until the predetermined entrance portion is set to the first state when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to secure a certain period of time as a period from when the game ball enters the specific entrance part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entrance part. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state under the condition that at least one game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the predetermined ball entering part in the first state. In the case of ensuring supply, it is possible to secure a certain period of time as a period until the predetermined ball-entry part is set to the first state when a game ball enters the specific ball-entry part. Become.

Feature A17. An operation execution means (a general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball entering the specific entrance unit;
The switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is executed, when the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball entering the specific pitching unit is completed. The gaming machine according to Feature A15 or A16, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, when the game ball enters the specific entrance portion, the operation execution means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the predetermined entrance portion enters the first state. . Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the predetermined pitching portion will be in the first state. Further, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the transition to the first state of the predetermined pitching portion is proper by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation is performed. In this case, since the configuration of the feature A15 or A16 is provided, a certain period is required as a period from when the game ball enters the specific entrance part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entrance part. It is secured. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state under the condition that at least one game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the predetermined ball entering part in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to ensure a period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means before the predetermined ball-entering portion enters the first state.

Feature A18. The situation in which the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state includes a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering part is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the predetermined ball entering part. A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation becomes the second situation or the second situation in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that is supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the predetermined entrance portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. Any one of the features A15 to A17, characterized in that a game ball supplied to the distribution means after the number of balls is guided to the second area and is guided to the second area. Game machines.

  According to the feature A18, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance The situation becomes the first situation or the first situation easily. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. Is likely to become the second situation or the second situation. As a result, the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first area, and the predetermined ball entering part is in the second state and the game ball is in the first area. It is possible to create a state where it is easy to flow in.

  In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game is supplied in the first situation, the distribution means is assigned to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball-entry unit. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined entrance and are supplied to the first area. In the second situation, the game balls are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific entrance. A game ball enters the predetermined entrance and is supplied to the second area. Accordingly, the game ball is supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second area in the second situation while making the operation mode of the distributing means common. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first situation, a game is entered in the first area while the number of game balls required from when the game ball is supplied to the specific entrance part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entrance part is the common number. In the second situation where a ball is supplied, it is possible to supply a game ball to the second area.

Feature A19. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second area in the second period. A guidance control means (a function of executing the processing of step S510, step S511 and step S612 to step S614 in the MPU 112) for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state;
In the first situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed so that the first period is reached when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of the game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance portion pass the guide position by the guide means. Control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed so that the second period is reached when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of the game balls that have entered the predetermined entrance portion pass the guide position by the guide means. The gaming machine according to Feature A18, wherein a control start timing is set.

  According to the feature A19, only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined ball portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the feature A18 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature A20. An operation execution means (a general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball entering the specific entrance unit;
The switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is executed, when the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball entering the specific pitching unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation in the first situation, and in a period corresponding to the second situation in the second situation. Operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (function to execute the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and step S1211 and step in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature A19, which includes a function of executing the process of S1212.

  According to the feature A20, there is an excellent effect as described in the feature A18 only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation execution unit in correspondence with each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature A21. First variable entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33)
The first giving means causes the first variable pitching means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area,
A third sorting direction is set as a sorting direction by the sorting means;
Any one of features A12 to A20, wherein a game ball is supplied toward the first variable pitching means when the direction of distribution by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Game machines.

  According to the feature A21, when a game ball that enters the predetermined entrance and flows down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable entrance means is in the first state. In this case, the player who expects the first variable entry means to enter the first state will play the game while expecting that the game ball that has entered the predetermined entry portion will flow into the first area. . In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction The game ball is supplied toward the predetermined ball entering portion, and the game ball is supplied toward the first variable ball entering means when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Thus, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied in a predetermined order to each of the specific ball entry unit, the predetermined ball entry unit, and the first variable ball entry unit. It becomes possible to do so.

  Feature A22. A feature that the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A22, the game balls supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry unit.

Feature A23. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the first distribution direction. A special number of game balls can be distributed to
When the first variable pitching means enters the first state triggered by the flow of game balls into the first area, the number of switching trigger game balls has entered the first variable pitching means. And means for setting the first variable pitching means to the second state based on the function (a function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112),
The gaming machine according to Feature A21 or A22, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching opportunity number.

  According to feature A23, when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, after the number of game balls of switching opportunity is supplied by the sorting means toward the first variable pitching means, The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entrance portion. As a result, when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, the game ball can be supplied to the specific pitching portion after the first variable pitching means is in the second state. Thus, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entry section in a situation where the first variable ball entry means is in the second state.

Feature A24. First variable entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33)
Second variable entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 34)
With
The first giving means causes the first variable pitching means to be in the first state when a game ball flows into the first area,
In the gaming machine, when a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second variable entry means (step S804 in the MPU 112) is configured so that the second variable entry means is in the first state. , The function of executing the processing of step S805 and step S910),
The first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
A third sorting direction is set as a sorting direction by the sorting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A23, wherein game balls are supplied toward the aggregated area when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the third distribution direction.

  According to the feature A24, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable pitching means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, The second variable entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable pitching means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guiding means, and the player is asked to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction When the game balls are supplied toward the predetermined pitching portion and the sorting direction by the sorting means is the third sorting direction, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided. Game balls are supplied toward As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, it is possible to supply the game balls in a predetermined order to each of the specific ball entering portion and the predetermined ball entering portion. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance part is guided to either the first area or the second area, the game ball is supplied to the variable entrance means corresponding to the guided area. It becomes possible to do.

  In particular, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the variable entry means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable entry means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it is not set as the structure by which distribution by an allocation means is separately performed with respect to each of a 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance means, these 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance ball It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

Feature A25. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player The game machine according to any one of features A12 to A24, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls more than the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature A25, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a certain number or more can be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which a game is played so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while substantially not reducing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  Feature A26. When each game ball distributed by the distribution means causes the entry to the specific entry part and the entry to the predetermined entry part before the distribution state makes one round, the distribution A game ball in which the specified number or more of game balls are given to the player or usable by the player based on a winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distributing means until the state makes one round The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein a process for increasing the number more than the specific number is executed.

  According to the feature A26, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution means in a state where the entry to the specific entry portion and the entry to the predetermined entry portion can occur, the distribution state is one round. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means, a specific number of game balls or more are given to the player, or the number of game balls usable by the player is increased by a specific number or more The process for making it perform is performed. Thereby, when a game is performed such that a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in a state where a ball entering the specific ball entering part and a ball entering the predetermined ball entering part can be generated, It is possible to play a game while not substantially reducing the number of available game balls.

Feature A27. A special game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry part before the distribution state makes one round. It has a club (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls of the game balls that have been distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one turn enter the special ball-entry part, the specific number of game balls or more are played. The gaming machine according to Feature A25 or A26, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player to the specified number or more is executed.

  According to the feature A27, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the game balls distributed by the distribution means enter the special entrance portion. And, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player or more than the specific number of game balls given to the player based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special pitch part The process is executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

Feature A28. A special pitching part (special winning part 142) into which a game ball that has been sorted in the second sorting direction by the sorting means but does not enter the predetermined pitching part,
A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entrance part The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, characterized in that is executed.

  According to the feature A28, even if the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means do not enter the predetermined entrance portion, they enter the special entrance portion. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry part, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group A, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A specific entry part (through winning part 36) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A special entry part (a branch entrance 61 in the first to third embodiments, a second special figure winning device 34 in the fourth to fifth embodiments) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the specific ball entry part, a first state in which a game ball can enter the special ball entry part and a second state in which game ball entry is impossible or difficult Switching control means (a function of executing processing during normal map fluctuation and processing during normal operation in the MPU 112) for switching control to each of
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area, on the upstream side of the specific ball entry portion and the special ball entry portion, the supplied game ball is one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction. Allocating means for sequentially changing the allocating direction triggered by the supply of game balls (in the first embodiment, the first allocating mechanism 71, the second allocating mechanism 72, the fourth allocating mechanism) In the embodiment, the first distribution mechanism 71, in the fifth embodiment, a third distribution mechanism 161 and a fourth distribution mechanism 162),
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In some cases, a game ball is supplied toward the special pitching portion.

  According to the feature B1, the special entrance portion is in the first state on the condition that at least one condition is that a game ball has entered the specific entrance portion. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the special entrance part also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entrance part.

  In this case, there is provided a sorting means for sequentially changing the sorting direction triggered by the supply of the game ball upstream of the specific pitching section and the special pitching section. When the direction is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction, the game ball is directed toward the special pitching portion. Is supplied. As a result, it is possible to supply the game ball toward the specific ball entry part by playing the game so that the game ball is supplied to the distribution means, and toward the special ball entry part. A game ball can be supplied. Further, by appropriately designing the configuration of the distribution means, the frequency at which the game balls are supplied toward the specific entrance portion and the frequency at which the game balls are supplied toward the special entrance portion are respectively determined by the designer. The frequency can be set. Furthermore, it is possible to supply the game ball to the special ball game unit after a predetermined period has elapsed since the game ball is supplied to the specific ball game unit. When at least one of the above conditions is met, the special ball entering portion is in the first state, so that the game ball can be reliably supplied to the special ball entering portion in the first state. .

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the allocating unit, the allocating state by the allocating unit makes one round.

  According to the feature B2, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

  Feature B3. Only game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the specific ball entry portion, and only game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means Is capable of entering the special entrance section, according to the feature B1 or B2.

  According to the feature B3, only the game balls distributed by the distributing means can enter the specific entrance portion and the special entrance portion. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the frequency of entrance into the specific entrance part and the special entrance part to a desired frequency.

  Feature B4. Features B1 to B1, wherein game balls supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

  According to the feature B4, a specific number of game balls supplied by the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed by the distribution unit in the first distribution direction are distributed in the second distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the club to when the game ball is supplied to the special ball club. As a result, when the special ball entering part is in the first state under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the special ball entering part that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a period until the special pitching portion is set to the first state when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the predetermined number is two or more.

  According to the feature B5, it is possible to secure a certain period as a period from when the game ball enters the specific entrance part to when the game ball is supplied to the special entrance part. As a result, when the special ball entering part is in the first state under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the special ball entering part that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to secure a certain period of time as a period until the special entry portion is set to the first state when a game ball enters the specific entry portion. Become.

  Feature B6. The distribution means determines that the first distribution direction and the second distribution direction before the game balls are distributed in the first distribution direction from the state in which the game balls are distributed in the second distribution direction. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or B5, wherein the gaming balls are in a state of being distributed in different distribution directions.

  According to the feature B6, the special entrance portion after the game ball enters the specific entrance portion using a period in which the game balls are distributed toward a side different from the specific entrance portion and the special entrance portion. It is possible to secure a certain period of time as a period until the game balls are supplied.

Feature B7. An operation execution means (a general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball entering the specific entrance unit;
The switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is executed, when the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball entering the specific pitching unit is completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, wherein:

  According to the feature B7, when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion, the operation execution means executes the pre-switching operation, and when the pre-switching operation ends, the special entrance portion enters the first state. . This makes it possible for the player to recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the special pitching portion will be in the first state. In addition, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the transition to the first state of the special pitching portion is normal by confirming whether or not the pre-switching operation is performed. In this case, by providing any one of the features B4 to B6, the period from when the game ball enters the specific ball entry part to when the game ball is supplied to the special ball entry part A certain period is secured. As a result, when the special ball entering part is in the first state under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering part, the game ball is placed in the special ball entering part that is in the first state. In the case of ensuring the supply, it is possible to ensure a period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation executing means before the special pitching portion enters the first state.

  Feature B8. In a predetermined gaming state (the first high probability state or the second high probability state in the first to third embodiments, the high frequency support mode in the fourth to fifth embodiments), the distribution means has the shortest When the game ball is supplied in the supply cycle, the switching is performed over a specific period that is less than or equal to the period required for the game ball to be supplied to the special ball entry unit after the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry unit. Means for causing the operation execution means to perform the previous operation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112, in the second embodiment, executing the processing of steps S1211 and S1212 in the MPU 112) A feature, a function of executing the processing of step S1505 in the MPU 112 in the fourth embodiment) is described in the feature B7 Of the game machine.

  According to the feature B8, when the game ball distributed by the distribution unit enters the specific ball entry part, the game ball distributed by the distribution unit to the special ball entry part next is the special ball entry part. It is possible to make the special pitching portion be in the first state before reaching.

  Feature B9. In a game state different from the predetermined game state, even if a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the shortest supply cycle, the special entry portion is set to the first state and then the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein a gaming ball is supplied to the special pitching unit after a period until the state is restored.

  According to the feature B9, in a game state different from the predetermined game state, even if the special ball entering part can be in the first state, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the special ball entering part. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of a predetermined gaming state.

Feature B10. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which game balls that have entered the special entry portion flow down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67),
A first granting unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S704, S705, and S908 in the MPU 112) that grants the privilege or a privilege different from the privilege when a game ball flows into the first area. When,
With
As a situation where the special entry part is in the first state, a game situation where a game ball entering the special entry part is guided to the first area, and a game entered the special entry part A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in a situation where the game ball can enter the special entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation becomes the second situation or the second situation in a situation where the game ball can enter the special entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means. A game ball that is supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the special entrance portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. Any one of the characteristics B4 to B9, wherein a game ball supplied to the distribution unit after the number of balls and which has entered the special entrance portion is guided to the second region. Game machines.

  According to the feature B10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the special entrance part is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the special entrance part. The situation becomes the first situation or the first situation easily. Further, in the second situation, the game ball that has entered the special entrance part is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the special entrance part. Is likely to become the second situation or the second situation. As a result, the special ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first area, and the special ball entry part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state where it is easy to flow in.

  In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game is supplied in the first situation, the distribution means is assigned to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball-entry unit. The supplied game balls enter the special entrance part and are supplied to the first area. In the second situation, the game balls are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific entrance part. A game ball enters the special entrance and is supplied to the second area. Accordingly, the game ball is supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second area in the second situation while making the operation mode of the distributing means common. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first situation, the game is placed in the first area while the number of game balls required from the time when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering part to the time when the game ball is supplied to the special ball entering part is the common number In the second situation where a ball is supplied, it is possible to supply a game ball to the second area.

Feature B11. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second area in the second period. A guidance control means (a function of executing the processing of step S510, step S511 and step S612 to step S614 in the MPU 112) for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state;
In the first situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed so that the first period is reached when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number of the game balls that have entered the special entrance section pass the guide position by the guide means. Control start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined ball is distributed with respect to the game ball distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution unit. The switching is performed so that the second period is reached when the game balls supplied to the distribution means after the number have passed through the guidance position by the guidance means. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein a control start timing is set.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature B10 only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the special pitching portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature B12. An operation execution means (a general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball entering the specific entrance unit;
The switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is executed, when the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball entering the specific pitching unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation in the first situation, and in a period corresponding to the second situation in the second situation. Operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (function to execute the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and step S1211 and step in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature B11, which includes a function of executing the processing of S1212.

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as described in the feature B10 only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation execution unit in correspondence with each of the first situation and the second situation. It becomes possible.

Feature B13. First variable entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33)
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entrance portion, the first variable entry means is made to enter the first state (the processing of steps S704, S705 and S908 in the MPU 112 is executed). Function)
With
A third sorting direction is set as a sorting direction by the sorting means;
Any one of the characteristics B1 to B12, wherein a game ball is supplied toward the first variable pitching means when the direction of distribution by the distribution means is the third distribution direction. Game machines.

  According to the feature B13, the first variable entry means is in the first state based on the game ball entering the special entry portion. In this case, the player who expects the first variable entry means to be in the first state plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the special entry portion. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction A game ball is supplied toward the special pitching portion, and a game ball is supplied toward the first variable pitching means when the sorting direction by the sorting means is the third sorting direction. Thus, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the game balls are supplied to the specific ball entry unit, the special ball entry unit, and the first variable ball entry unit in a predetermined order. It becomes possible to do so.

  Feature B14. A feature B13 is characterized in that the game balls supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution unit are distributed in the first distribution direction. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B14, the game balls supplied to the sorting means after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the third distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry unit.

Feature B15. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the third distribution direction, the third distribution direction until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the first distribution direction. A special number of game balls can be distributed to
When the first variable pitching means is in the first state, the first variable pitching means is moved to the second variable pitching means based on the fact that a number of game balls have entered the first variable pitching means. Means for setting the state (function to execute the processing of step S707 to step S710 in the MPU 112),
The game machine according to Feature B13 or B14, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching opportunity number.

  According to feature B15, when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, after the switching means number of game balls are supplied by the sorting means toward the first variable pitching means, The distribution state of the means is a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entrance portion. As a result, when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, the game ball can be supplied to the specific pitching portion after the first variable pitching means is in the second state. Thus, in a situation where the first variable entry means is in the second state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific entry portion.

Feature B16. A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which game balls that have entered the special entry portion flow down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67),
First variable entry means (first special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 33)
Second variable entry means (second special figure winning device) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult. 34)
When a game ball flows into the first area, the first giving means (function to execute the processing of step S704, step S705 and step S908 in the MPU 112) causes the first variable pitching means to be in the first state. )When,
When a game ball flows into the second area, the second giving means (the function of executing the processing of steps S804, S805 and S910 in the MPU 112) causes the second variable pitching means to be in the first state. )When,
With
The first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
A third sorting direction is set as a sorting direction by the sorting means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B15, wherein game balls are supplied toward the aggregation region when a distribution direction by the distribution unit is the third distribution direction.

  According to the feature B16, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable pitching means becomes the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area. The second variable entry means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable pitching means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guiding means, and the player is asked to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention. In this configuration, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction When the game balls are supplied toward the special pitching portion, and the sorting direction by the sorting means is the third sorting direction, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided. Game balls are supplied toward As a result, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distributing means, it is possible to supply the game balls in a predetermined order to each of the specific ball entry part and the special ball entry part. At the same time, even if the game ball that has entered the special entrance portion is guided to either the first region or the second region, the game ball is supplied to the variable entrance means corresponding to the guided region. It becomes possible to do.

  In particular, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the variable entry means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable entry means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it is not set as the structure by which distribution by an allocation means is separately performed with respect to each of a 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance means, these 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance ball It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

  Feature B17. A feature B1 is characterized in that game balls supplied to the sorting means after a specific number of game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. Thru | or the game machine of any one of B16.

  According to the feature B17, the game balls supplied to the distribution means after a specific number of game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means are distributed in the first distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period from when the game ball enters the ball means to when the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entry portion.

Feature B18. When the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the second distribution direction, the second distribution direction until the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game balls in the first distribution direction. A specific number of game balls can be distributed to
Means (MPU112) for setting the special pitching portion in the second state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special pitching portion when the special pitching portion is in the first state. In step S1701 and step S1703).
The gaming machine according to Feature B17, wherein the specific number is equal to or greater than the predetermined opportunity number.

  According to the feature B18, when the special pitching portion is in the first state, after the predetermined number of game balls are supplied to the special pitching portion by the sorting means, A state will be in the state which distributes a game ball toward a specific entrance part. As a result, when the special pitching portion is in the first state, it is possible to supply game balls to the specific pitching portion after the special pitching portion is in the second state. In a situation where the ball part is in the second state, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the specific ball entering part.

  Feature B19. The time period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the specific balls can enter the specific ball-entry portion is greater than the distribution time. The game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the means are longer than the period required for reaching the position where the special balls can be entered from the predetermined height position. A gaming machine according to feature B17 or B18, characterized in that a passage configuration from the distribution means to the specific entry portion and a passage configuration from the distribution means to the special entry portion are set.

  According to the feature B19, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the specific balls can enter the specific ball entry portion is By being set longer than the period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position at which the special balls can be entered from the predetermined height position, It is possible to ensure a long period of time required for the game ball to reach the specific ball entry part after the game ball enters the special ball entry part. As a result, when the special pitching portion is in the first state, the game balls are supplied to the specific pitching portion after the special pitching portion is in the second state based on the pitching into the special pitching portion. It becomes possible to make it possible to generate a game ball into the specific ball entry part in a situation where the special ball entry part is in the second state. In addition, the above-described entrance period is set by the path configuration from the sorting means to the specific entrance section and the path configuration from the sorting means to the special entrance section, so that It is possible to produce the above-described effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature B20. A specific guide passage section (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entrance section;
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the special entrance portion;
With
The passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific entrance portion in the specific guide passage section is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the special entrance section in the predetermined guide passage section. The gaming machine according to any one of features B17 to B19, which is set to be large.

  According to the feature B20, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the specific guide passage section to the specific entrance section is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position in the predetermined guide passage section to the special entrance section. As a result, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the specific balls can enter the specific ball-entry portion is determined. It is possible to make it longer than the period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the special balls can enter the special ball entry section from a predetermined height position. As a result, when the special pitching portion is in the first state, the game balls are supplied to the specific pitching portion after the special pitching portion is in the second state based on the pitching into the special pitching portion. It becomes possible to make it possible to generate a game ball into the specific ball entry part in a situation where the special ball entry part is in the second state. In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects only by adjusting the passage length dimensions of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

  Feature B21. The gaming machine according to Feature B19 or B20, wherein the specific number is one.

  According to the feature B21, the game ball supplied to the distribution unit next to the game ball supplied toward the special ball entry unit is supplied to the specific ball entry unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a useless game ball from being generated after the game ball is supplied toward the special ball entry part until the game ball is supplied toward the specific ball entry part. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature B19 or B20, it is possible for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to enter the specific ball entry portion from a predetermined height position. The time required to reach the position is the time required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the special balls can enter the special ball entry section from the predetermined height position. Can be made longer.

Feature B22. The second distribution direction is a direction directed vertically downward from the distribution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B21, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means toward a side different from a vertically downward direction.

  According to the feature B22, since the special entry portion is provided at the position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distribution means are provided, the entry into the specific entry portion is triggered. It is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the possible special pitching part. As a result, the movement of the game balls distributed toward the special entry portion by the distributing means is in the middle even though the special entry portion has entered the first state in response to the entry to the specific entry portion. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the special entry portion becomes in the second state before the entry into the special entry portion occurs.

Feature B23. Acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on the game ball entering the special ball entry unit;
A game turn control means (step S1006 in the MPU 112) for controlling the game turn execution means (second special figure display unit 45b) so that the game turn action is executed based on the acquisition of the predetermined information by the acquisition means. To the function of executing the process of step S1008),
With
The game times control means includes
The game replay operation is performed over a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest entry period when a game ball enters the special entry portion. 1 control means (function for executing the process of step S1905 in the MPU 112);
Second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) for executing the game turning operation over a second operation period (fixed long period) equal to or greater than the shortest pitching cycle;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B22, wherein:

  According to the feature B23, in a situation in which the game turning operation is executed over the first operation period, the period is shorter than the shortest entry period when the entry of the game ball into the special entry portion occurs. Since the game turning operation is completed, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information is not acquired even though the game ball has entered the special ball entry section. On the other hand, in the situation where the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period, the game turning over a period equal to or longer than the shortest entry period when a game ball enters the special entry portion occurs. Since the operation for the game continues, it is possible to create a situation in which the player pays attention to the game rotation operation.

  Feature B24. The gaming machine according to Feature B23, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

  According to the feature B24, since there is only one kind of first operation period, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period.

Feature B25. Predetermined information storage means (second special figure reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the grant determination unit (steps S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that executes grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. The function of executing the processing of S1105),
With
The game times control means is configured to execute the game times operation when the grant determination is executed by the grant determination means.
The first control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turning operation. The gaming machine according to Feature B23 or B24, wherein when the game turning operation is executed using information as a trigger, the game turning operation is executed over the first operation period. .

  According to the feature B25, when the game turning operation is executed by using predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information in a situation where a plurality of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, The game turning operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest pitching cycle when the game ball enters the club. As a result, the possibility that a game ball will be newly entered into the special ball-throwing portion despite the fact that a predetermined number of predetermined information has already been stored in the predetermined information storage means is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult to generate an event in which predetermined information is not acquired even though a game ball has entered the special ball entry section.

Feature B26. Predetermined information storage means (second special figure reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
The game times control means is configured to execute the game times operation when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B25, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number.

  According to the feature B26, when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit in a situation where the game turning operation is being executed. It becomes possible to do so. Thereby, it is possible to cause a situation in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

  Feature B27. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number, and is less than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number plus one. The gaming machine according to Feature B26, characterized by:

  According to the feature B27, in the case where another predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period using the predetermined information as an execution trigger, It is possible to store a predetermined number of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game operation is being executed, while in the situation where the game turning operation is being executed, It is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of game balls from entering.

  Feature B28. When the second control means causes the game turning operation to be executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turning action, The gaming machine according to the feature B26 or B27, wherein the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period.

  According to the feature B28, when the game turning operation is executed with the predetermined information as an execution trigger in a situation where other predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the game entry operation having the shortest game turning operation is performed. It is executed over a second operation period that is a period equal to or longer than the product of the period and the predetermined number. As a result, when the predetermined information storage means does not store the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game turning operation, a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B29. Predetermined information storage means (second special figure reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the grant determination unit (steps S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that executes grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. The function of executing the processing of S1105),
With
The game times control means is configured to execute the game times operation when the grant determination is executed by the grant determination means.
The first control means does not correspond to the given correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turning operation. In the case of executing the game turn operation triggered by information, the game turn operation is executed over the first operation period,
When the second control means causes the game turning operation to be executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers execution of the game turning action, A game turning operation is performed over the second operation period;
When the game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game turning operation is repeatedly executed with the predetermined information not corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an execution opportunity, The game operation for the first operation period is executed until the game operation is executed a predetermined number of times, and the game operation for the second operation period is executed in the next execution time. The gaming machine according to any one of features B23 to B28, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

  According to the feature B29, a game ball is supplied to the distribution means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and a game turning operation is repeatedly executed with predetermined information not corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an execution trigger. In such a case, a situation occurs in which the game turning operation in the second operation period is executed once after the game turning operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the entry to the special entry portion, the operation for the game turn is performed in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game turn operation is increased. It is possible to periodically create a situation where the program is executed over a relatively long period of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the production favorable accordingly.

  Feature B30. Means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123) is provided so that a predetermined effect is executed when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine according to Feature B29, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B30, in order to prevent a situation in which predetermined information is not acquired in spite of the occurrence of the entry to the special entry portion, in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game turning operation is increased, Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

Feature B31. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B30, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls more than the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature B31, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a certain number or more can be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which a game is played so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while substantially not reducing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  Feature B32. When each game ball distributed by the allocating means makes a round to the special entry part before the allocating state makes one round, the allocating means until the allocating state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on a winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by The gaming machine according to Feature B31, wherein is executed.

  According to the feature B32, when the game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where the special entering portion can be entered, the game is distributed by the sorting means until the sorting state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls usable by the player by a specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is performed such that a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the special ball club, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing it.

Feature B33. A special game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the special ball entry part before the distribution state makes one round. It has a club (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls of the game balls that have been distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one turn enter the special ball-entry part, the specific number of game balls or more are played. The gaming machine according to Feature B31 or B32, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player to the specified number or more is executed.

  According to the feature B33, the game balls distributed by the sorting means enter the special entrance portion even when the entrance into the special entrance portion does not occur. And, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player or more than the specific number of game balls given to the player based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special pitch part The process is executed. As a result, even when no special ball is entered, even if the game is performed so that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

Feature B34. A special entry part (special prize winning part 142) into which game balls that have been distributed in the second assignment direction by the assignment means but do not enter the special entry part enter;
A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entrance part The gaming machine according to Feature B31 or B32, wherein is executed.

  According to the feature B34, even if the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means do not enter the special entry part, they enter the special entry part. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry part, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Executed. As a result, even when no special ball is entered, even if the game is performed so that game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B34, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature group B, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the flowing-down mode of the game ball in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A first variable provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter is difficult or difficult. A means for entering a ball (first special figure winning device 33);
A second variable entry means (second entry) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is impossible or difficult. 2 special figure winning device 34),
A lottery process is executed based on occurrence of a game ball entering the first variable entry means, and a lottery process is executed based on occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable entry means. And a lottery process executed based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means and a lottery executed based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Lottery execution means (a function of executing the processes of step S1001, step S1102 and step S1103 in the MPU 112) in which the execution mode of the lottery process differs depending on the process;
A predetermined entrance part (branch entrance 61) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A predetermined passage portion (branch passage 65) through which game balls that have entered the predetermined entry portion flow down;
The game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided to one of a plurality of areas including a first area (downstream of the first derivation area 65c) and a second area (second derivation area 65d). Guiding means (switching piece 67),
When a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first giving means (steps S704, S705 and step in the MPU 112) is performed so that the first variable pitching means is in the first state. The function of executing the processing of S908),
When the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second giving means (step S804, step S805 and step in the MPU 112) is set so that the second variable pitching means enters the first state. The function of executing the processing of S910),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the first variable ball entry means, and the lottery process is executed based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. Executed. And the execution mode of the lottery process is different between the former lottery process and the latter lottery process. This makes it possible to diversify the lottery process execution timing and diversify the lottery process execution mode in accordance with the lottery process execution timing.

  In this case, if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first area, the first variable pitching means is in the first state, and if the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second area, the second The variable pitching means is in the first state. As a result, the type of the variable pitching means that is in the first state differs depending on the guidance mode by the guiding means, and the player is asked to which area the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is guided. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  Feature C2. In the case where the lottery process is executed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means, the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the feature C1, which is more advantageous for the player than when the lottery process is executed.

  According to the feature C2, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball enters the second variable entry means than the game ball enters the first variable entry means. As a result, when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance, the player expects the game ball to be guided to the second region, and the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion is in any region. It is possible to increase the player's attention to whether it is guided.

Feature C3. When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the probability that the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or flows into the first region is the same as the first region. Has a higher probability of flowing into different areas,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the probability that the game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the second region or flows into the second region is in the first region. The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming machine has a higher configuration than the probability of inflow.

  According to the feature C3, in the first gaming state, the probability that a game ball flowing down the predetermined passage portion flows into the first region or into the first region is high, while in the second gaming state, the predetermined passage portion is There is a high probability that a game ball that flows down flows into the second area or flows into the second area. Thus, a state in which a lottery process is easily executed when a game ball enters the first variable ball entry means, and a lottery process triggered by a game ball entering the second variable ball entry means It is possible to create a state where each is easily executed.

Feature C4. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The situation in which the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state includes a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering part is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the predetermined ball entering part. A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
In the first game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance part, the probability of becoming the first situation or the first situation is greater than the probability of becoming the second situation. Is a high configuration,
In the second game state, in a situation where a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance part, the probability of becoming the second situation or the second situation is greater than the probability of becoming the first situation. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, which has a high configuration.

  According to the feature C4, the predetermined entrance portion cannot or does not enter the game ball in the second state, and can enter the game ball in the first state. Thereby, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined entrance part will pay attention to whether or not the predetermined entrance part is in the first state. In this case, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. In the situation, it becomes the first situation or is likely to become the first situation. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. Is likely to become the second situation or the second situation. As a result, the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first area, and the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state where it is easy to flow in.

Feature C5. In the gaming area, a plurality of supplied gaming balls including a predetermined sorting direction and a specific sorting direction are provided upstream of the predetermined pitching portion, the first variable pitching means, and the second variable pitching means. Distributing means (first distribution mechanism 71, second distribution mechanism 72) that distributes to any one of the distribution directions and sequentially changes the distribution direction when a game ball is supplied Prepared,
The first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the provided variable ball entry means is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area can flow down toward the variable ball entry means provided on the downstream side,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined entrance portion, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein game balls are supplied toward the aggregation area.

  According to the feature C5, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the predetermined distribution direction, the game balls are supplied toward the predetermined pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction The game balls are supplied toward the aggregation area where the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are provided. Thus, by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the allocating means, it is possible to supply the game balls to the predetermined ball-in-part in a predetermined order. Even if the game ball that entered the ball is guided to either the first region or the second region, the game ball can be supplied to the variable ball entry means corresponding to the guided region.

  In particular, the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means are provided side by side in the flow direction of the game balls in the aggregation area, and the upstream side of the first variable pitching means and the second variable pitching means. When the variable entry means provided in the second state is in the second state, the game balls that have flowed into the aggregation area flow down toward the variable entry means provided on the downstream side. Thereby, even if it is not set as the structure by which distribution by an allocation means is separately performed with respect to each of a 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance means, these 1st variable entrance means and a 2nd variable entrance ball It becomes possible to supply the game ball to the side in the first state of the means.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the allocating unit, the allocating state by the allocating unit makes one round.

  According to the feature C6, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner.

  Feature C7. Only game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means can enter the predetermined ball-entry part, and only game balls distributed in the specific distribution direction by the distribution means are The gaming machine according to C5 or C6, wherein the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are capable of entering the side in the first state.

  According to the feature C7, only the game balls distributed by the distribution unit can enter the predetermined ball entry unit, the first variable ball entry unit, and the second variable ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes easy to design the entrance frequency to the predetermined entrance part, the first variable entrance means, and the second variable entrance means to a desired frequency.

  Feature C8. Features C5 to C7 characterized in that a predetermined number of game balls are distributed to the specific distribution direction after a predetermined number of game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C8, a predetermined number of game balls to be supplied to the distribution unit after a predetermined number of game balls distributed to the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution unit are distributed in the specific distribution direction. It is possible to secure a period until the game balls are supplied to the aggregate area of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means after the game balls enter the ball.

Feature C9. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball entering a specific pitching portion (through winning portion 36),
A separate distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific entrance portion,
When the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the specific distribution direction, a special number in the specific distribution direction until the distribution means is in a state of distributing game balls in the separate distribution direction. Game balls are distributed,
The gaming machine is
When the first variable pitching means enters the first state triggered by the flow of game balls into the first area, the number of switching trigger game balls has entered the first variable pitching means. A means for setting the first variable pitching means to the second state based on the function (a function of executing the processing of steps S707 to S710 in the MPU 112);
When the second variable pitching means is in the first state triggered by the flow of game balls into the second area, the switching variable number of game balls have entered the second variable pitching means. A means for setting the second variable entry means to the second state based on the function (a function of executing the processing of steps S807 to S810 in the MPU 112);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, wherein the special number is equal to or greater than the switching opportunity number.

  According to the feature C9, the predetermined entrance portion is in the first state on the condition that at least one condition is that a game ball has entered the specific entrance portion. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the predetermined entrance part also pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the specific entrance part. In addition, when the distribution direction by the distribution means is a different distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching part, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is a predetermined distribution direction, A game ball is supplied toward the section, and when the distribution direction by the distribution means is the specific distribution direction, the game ball is supplied toward the aggregation region. As a result, it is possible to sequentially supply the game balls toward the respective entry locations by playing the game so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means.

  In the above configuration, when the first variable pitching means is in the first state, after the switching means number of game balls are supplied by the sorting means toward the first variable pitching means, When the minute state becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific pitching portion, and the second variable pitching means is in the first state, the number of switching opportunities by the sorting means toward the second variable pitching means. After the game balls are supplied, the distribution state of the distribution means becomes a state in which the game balls are distributed toward the specific entrance portion. As a result, when the first variable pitching means or the second variable pitching means is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific pitching portion after the variable pitching means is in the second state. Thus, it is possible to generate a game ball into the specific ball entry section in a situation where the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the second state.

Feature C10. Switching control means for controlling the predetermined entry portion between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or that is difficult or difficult. The function to execute middle processing and normal power operation processing)
The switching control means is configured to execute the switching control based on a game ball entering a specific pitching portion (through winning portion 36),
A separate distribution direction is set as the distribution direction by the distribution means,
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the separate distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific entrance portion,
The situation in which the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state includes a first situation in which a game ball that has entered the predetermined ball entering part is guided to the first area, and a game that has entered the predetermined ball entering part. A second situation exists in which a sphere is guided to the second region;
When the gaming state is the first gaming state (first high probability state), the situation becomes the first situation or the first situation in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the second situation,
When the gaming state is the second gaming state (second high probability state), the situation becomes the second situation or the second situation in a situation where the gaming ball can enter the predetermined entry part. The probability is higher than the probability of the first situation,
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, the game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means after the predetermined number A game ball that is supplied to the sorting means and that has entered the predetermined entrance portion is guided to the first area,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. Any one of the features C5 to C9, wherein a game ball that is supplied to the distribution unit and that has entered the predetermined entrance portion is guided to the second region. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C10, in the first situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the first area, and in the first game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance The situation becomes the first situation or the first situation easily. In the second situation, the game ball that has entered the predetermined entrance is guided to the second area, and in the second game state, the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance. Is likely to become the second situation or the second situation. As a result, the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is likely to flow into the first area, and the predetermined ball entering part is in the first state and the game ball is in the second area. It is possible to create a state where it is easy to flow in.

  In this case, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means at a predetermined supply cycle, if the game is supplied in the first situation, the distribution means is assigned to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific ball-entry unit. The supplied game balls enter the predetermined entrance and are supplied to the first area. In the second situation, the game balls are supplied to the distribution means after a predetermined number of game balls supplied to the specific entrance. A game ball enters the predetermined entrance and is supplied to the second area. Accordingly, the game ball is supplied to the first area in the first situation and the game ball is supplied to the second area in the second situation while making the operation mode of the distributing means common. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first situation, a game is entered in the first area while the number of game balls required from when the game ball is supplied to the specific entrance part to when the game ball is supplied to the predetermined entrance part is the common number. In the second situation where a ball is supplied, it is possible to supply a game ball to the second area.

Feature C11. When the timing at which the switching control is started is used as a reference, the game ball is guided to the first area in the first period, and the game ball is guided to the second area in the second period. A guidance control means (a function of executing the processing of step S510, step S511 and step S612 to step S614 in the MPU 112) for controlling the guidance means so as to be in a state;
In the first situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control so that the first period is reached when a game ball that has been supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the predetermined entrance portion passes through a guide position by the guide means. Start timing is set,
In the second situation, when the game balls are supplied to the distribution means in the predetermined supply cycle, the predetermined number of game balls distributed in the separate distribution direction by the distribution means. The switching control so that the second period is reached when a game ball that is supplied to the distribution means and that has entered the predetermined entrance part passes through a guide position by the guide means. The game machine according to Feature C10, wherein a start timing is set.

  According to the feature C11, only by adjusting the start timing of the switching control of the predetermined entrance portion corresponding to each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the feature C10 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature C12. An operation execution means (a general-purpose display unit 46) for executing a pre-switching operation based on a game ball entering the specific entrance unit;
The switching control means is configured to start the switching control when the switching control is executed, when the pre-switching operation started based on a game ball entering the specific pitching unit is completed. Yes,
The gaming machine causes the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation over a period corresponding to the first situation in the first situation, and in a period corresponding to the second situation in the second situation. Operation control means for causing the operation execution means to perform the pre-switching operation (function to execute the processing of steps S407 and S408 in the MPU 112 in the first embodiment, and step S1211 and step in the MPU 112 in the second embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature C11, which includes a function of executing the process of S1212.

  According to the feature C12, only by adjusting the period during which the pre-switching operation is executed in the operation execution unit in accordance with each of the first situation and the second situation, the excellent effect as described in the feature C10 can be obtained. It becomes possible.

Feature C13. When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player The game machine according to any one of features C5 to C12, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls more than the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature C13, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a certain number or more can be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which a game is played so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while substantially not reducing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  Feature C14. When each game ball distributed by the allocating means makes one turn before the allocating state makes one round, the allocating means until the allocating state makes one lap. A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on a winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by The gaming machine according to Feature C13, wherein is executed.

  According to the feature C14, when the game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion can occur, the game is distributed by the sorting means until the sorting state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls usable by the player by a specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is performed such that a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball club, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing it.

Feature C15. A special game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry part before the distribution state makes one round. It has a club (special prize section 142),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls of the game balls that have been distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one turn enter the special ball-entry part, the specific number of game balls or more are played. The game machine according to Feature C13 or C14, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player to the specified number or more is executed.

  According to the feature C15, the game balls distributed by the allocating means enter the special entrance portion even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur. And, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player or more than the specific number of game balls given to the player based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special pitch part The process is executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

Feature C16. A special pitching portion (special winning portion 142) into which game balls that have been sorted by the sorting means in the predetermined sorting direction but do not enter the predetermined pitching portion enter.
A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entrance part The gaming machine according to Feature C13 or C14, wherein is executed.

  According to the feature C16, even if the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means do not enter the predetermined entrance portion, they enter the special entrance portion. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry part, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C16, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group C, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A distribution unit that distributes game balls supplied in a game area to any of a plurality of types of distribution directions, and sequentially changes the distribution direction when the game balls are supplied (first embodiment) The first distribution mechanism 71 and the second distribution mechanism 72, the fourth embodiment includes the first distribution mechanism 71, and the fifth embodiment includes the third distribution mechanism 161 and the fourth distribution mechanism 162). ,
When a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round,
Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round, the specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or can be used by the player A gaming machine characterized in that a process for increasing the number of game balls more than the specific number can be executed.

  According to the feature D1, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit, the game ball is sequentially supplied to each area corresponding to each distribution direction of the distribution unit. In addition, when a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means, the distribution state by the distribution means makes one round, so that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It becomes possible to repeatedly distribute the game balls in a certain manner. In this case, a specific number or more of the game balls can be given to the player or used by the player based on winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the distribution state makes one round. A process for increasing the number of possible game balls by a certain number or more can be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which a game is played so that the game balls are supplied toward the distribution means while substantially not reducing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

Feature D2. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is a predetermined distribution direction, a predetermined ball entering portion (in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the branch inlet 61, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, Game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34),
When a game ball distributed by the allocating means causes the ball to enter the predetermined entrance part before the allocating state makes one round, the allocating unit causes the allocating state to make one lap. Based on the winning by at least a part of each distributed game ball, a process for giving the player more than the specified number of game balls or increasing the number of game balls usable by the player more than the specified number The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature D2, when a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion can occur, the game is distributed by the sorting means until the sorting state makes one round. Based on the winning of at least a part of each game ball, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls usable by the player by a specific number or more is executed. As a result, when a game is performed such that a game ball is supplied to the sorting means in a state where a ball can enter the predetermined ball club, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced. It is possible to play a game while not reducing it.

Feature D3. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is a predetermined distribution direction, a predetermined ball entering portion (in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the branch inlet 61, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, Game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34),
A special game ball distributed by the distribution means enters when the game ball distributed by the distribution means does not enter the predetermined ball entry part before the distribution state makes one round. A winning part (special winning part 142 in the third embodiment, special winning part 155 in the fourth and fifth embodiments),
Based on the fact that a corresponding number of game balls of the game balls that have been distributed by the distribution means before the distribution state makes one turn enter the special ball-entry part, the specific number of game balls or more are played. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, wherein a process for increasing the number of game balls given to the player or usable by the player to the specified number or more is executed.

  According to the feature D3, the game balls distributed by the sorting means enter the special entrance portion even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur. And, in order to increase the number of game balls that can be used by the player or more than the specific number of game balls given to the player based on the fact that the corresponding number of game balls have entered the special pitch part The process is executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

Feature D4. When the distribution direction by the distribution means is a predetermined distribution direction, a predetermined ball entering portion (in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, the branch inlet 61, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, Game balls are supplied to the second special figure winning device 34),
A special pitching portion (a special winning portion 142 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment) in which game balls that are distributed in the predetermined sorting direction by the sorting means but do not enter the predetermined pitching portion enter. In the embodiment and the fifth embodiment, a special winning section 155) is provided,
A process for increasing the number of game balls to be given to the player or to be used by the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special entrance part The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that is executed.

  According to the feature D4, the game balls distributed in the predetermined distribution direction by the distribution means enter the special ball-entry part even if they do not enter the predetermined ball-entry part. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry part, a process for giving a specific number or more of game balls to the player or increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more is performed. Executed. Thus, even when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion does not occur, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is substantially reduced when the game is performed such that the game balls are supplied to the distribution means. It is possible to play a game while keeping it from decreasing.

Feature D5. Special entry means (special prize-winning device 35) provided so as to be switchable between a first state in which a game ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball cannot be entered or difficult,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the distribution unit is provided downstream of the special ball entry unit in the flow-down direction of the game ball.

  According to the feature D5, game balls that have been supplied to the special entry means but have not entered the special entry means are supplied to the distribution means. Based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until the game ball is supplied and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round, a specific number of game balls or more are given to the player A process for increasing the number of game balls that can be awarded or used by the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which a game is performed so that the game balls are supplied toward the special ball entry means while not substantially reducing the number of game balls that can be used by the player. .

  Feature D6. The distribution guidance means for guiding the game balls supplied to the special entry means but not entered into the special entry means to the distribution means (in the third embodiment, a guidance unit). 141, the gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized in that it includes a guiding part 151 in the fourth embodiment and a guiding part 163) in the fifth embodiment.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to ensure that game balls that are supplied to the special entry means and that have not entered the special entry means are supplied to the distribution means. It becomes.

  Feature D7. Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery process is the winning result, the special entry means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (MPU112) that is repeatedly switched between the first state and the second state. The game machine according to feature D5 or D6, further including a function of executing the process of step S1009 in FIG.

  According to the feature D7, even if the game ball supplied toward the special entry means in the special game state does not enter the special entry means, the game ball is supplied to the distribution means. Then, based on the winning by at least a part of each game ball distributed by the distribution means until a specific number of game balls are supplied to the distribution means and the distribution state of the distribution means makes one round, A specific number or more of game balls can be given to the player, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player by a specific number or more can be executed. As a result, even if the game ball is supplied toward the special entry means in the special game state, even if the game ball does not enter the special entry means, the decrease of the game balls due to that amount occurs substantially. It becomes possible not to do.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D7, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A specific entry part (through winning part 36) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Predetermined entrance portion where game balls flowing down the game area can enter (the branch entrance 61 in the first and third embodiments, the second special figure winning in the fourth and fifth embodiments) Device 34);
Any one of a plurality of types of distribution directions including a first distribution direction and a second distribution direction is provided on the upstream side of the specific ball entry unit and the predetermined ball entry unit in the game area. Distribution means (first distribution mechanism 71 in the fourth embodiment) that sequentially changes the distribution direction triggered by the supply of game balls.
With
When the distribution direction by the distribution means is the first distribution direction, a game ball is supplied toward the specific pitching portion, and the distribution direction by the distribution means is the second distribution direction. In some cases, a game ball is supplied toward the predetermined pitching portion,
The time period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the specific balls can enter the specific ball-entry portion is greater than the distribution time. The game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the means are longer than a period required to reach a position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball entry section from the predetermined height position. A gaming machine, characterized in that a passage configuration from a distribution means to the specific entry portion and a passage configuration from the distribution means to the predetermined entry portion are set.

  According to the feature E1, when the game ball is supplied to the distribution unit, the game ball is sequentially supplied to each area corresponding to each distribution direction of the distribution unit. In this case, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach the position where the specific balls can be entered from the predetermined height position is allocated. The game ball distributed in the second distribution direction by the means is set longer than the period required for reaching the position where the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section from the predetermined height position. It is possible to ensure a long period of time from the game ball entering the ball portion until the game ball reaches the specific ball entry portion. In addition, since the above-described entrance period is set by the passage configuration from the sorting means to the specific entrance portion and the passage configuration from the assignment means to the predetermined entrance portion, It is possible to produce the above-described effects while keeping the distribution mode constant.

Feature E2. A specific guide passage section (fourth guide rail 156) for guiding the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to the specific entrance section;
A predetermined guide passage portion (second guide rail 153) for guiding the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to the predetermined entrance portion;
With
The path length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific entrance ball section in the specific guide path section is larger than the path length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined entrance section in the predetermined guide path section. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the gaming machine is set large.

  According to the feature E2, the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the specific entrance portion in the specific guide passage section is larger than the passage length dimension from the predetermined height position to the predetermined entrance section in the predetermined guide passage section. As a result, the period required for the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the specific balls can enter the specific ball-entry portion is determined. It is possible to make it longer than the time period required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position at which the predetermined ball position can be entered from the predetermined height position. As a result, when the predetermined ball entering portion is in the first state, the game ball is supplied to the specific ball entering portion after the predetermined ball entering portion is in the second state based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion. It becomes possible to make it possible to generate a game ball to enter the specific ball entry part in a situation where the predetermined ball entry part is in the second state. In addition, according to this configuration, it is possible to produce the above-described effects only by adjusting the passage length dimensions of the specific guide passage portion and the predetermined guide passage portion.

  Feature E3. E1 or the game balls supplied to the distribution means one after the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means in the first distribution direction A gaming machine according to E2.

  According to the feature E3, the game ball supplied to the distribution unit next to the game ball supplied toward the predetermined entrance portion is supplied to the specific entrance portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent a useless game ball from being generated after the game ball is supplied toward the predetermined entrance portion until the game ball is supplied toward the specific entrance portion. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature E1, the game balls distributed in the first distribution direction by the distribution means can be placed at a position where they can enter the specific entry portion from a predetermined height position. The time required for reaching the game ball is longer than the time required for the game balls distributed in the second distribution direction by the distribution means to reach a position where the game balls can enter the predetermined ball-entry part from the predetermined height position. It can be made longer.

Feature E4. The second distribution direction is a direction directed vertically downward from the distribution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first distribution direction is a direction from the distribution means toward a side different from a vertically downward direction.

  According to the feature E4, the predetermined ball portion is provided at a position where the game balls distributed vertically downward by the distribution unit are supplied, and the game balls distributed by the distribution unit in the second distribution direction are By setting the period required to reach the predetermined pitching portion to be short, it is possible to smoothly supply the game balls to the predetermined pitching portion.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E4, one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group D and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the flowing-down mode of the game ball in the game area preferable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A special entry part (second special figure winning device 34) in which a game ball flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter,
Acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S1101 in the MPU 112) for acquiring predetermined information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special ball entry unit;
Predetermined information storage means (second special figure reservation area 134) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage unit, the grant determination unit (steps S1103 and step in the MPU 112) that executes grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant of the privilege. The function of executing the processing of S1105),
Game time control means (in the MPU 112) for controlling the game time execution means (the second special figure display unit 45b) so that the game rotation operation is executed in response to the execution of the grant determination by the grant determination means. The function of executing the processing of steps S1006 to S1008),
With
The game times control means includes
In the situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game turning operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information is used as an execution trigger. In the case of executing the game turning operation, the game turning operation is performed over a first operation period (fixed short period) shorter than the shortest entry cycle in the case where a game ball enters the special entry portion. First control means (function for executing the processing of step S1905 in the MPU 112) to cause the operation to be executed;
In the case where the game rotation operation is executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation, Second control means (a function of executing the process of step S1906 in the MPU 112) that allows the game turning operation to be executed over a second operation period (fixed long period);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, when the game turning operation is executed with predetermined information that does not correspond to the assigned correspondence information in a situation where a plurality of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, The game turning operation is executed in a period shorter than the shortest pitching cycle when the game ball enters the club. As a result, the possibility that a game ball will be newly entered into the special ball-throwing portion despite the fact that a predetermined number of predetermined information has already been stored in the predetermined information storage means is reduced. Therefore, it is difficult to generate an event in which predetermined information is not acquired even though a game ball has entered the special ball entry section. On the other hand, when the game turning operation is executed with the predetermined information as an execution trigger in a situation where other predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the game turning operation is equal to or longer than the shortest pitching cycle. Executed over a period of time. As a result, when the predetermined information that is not the execution target of the game turning operation is not stored in the predetermined information storage means, the second hold information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. It becomes possible.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the first operation period is only one type.

  According to the feature F2, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity for storing the operation period because there is only one type of the first operation period.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to F1 or F2, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number.

  According to the feature F3, when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period, a predetermined number of pieces of predetermined information are stored in the predetermined information storage unit in a situation where the game turning operation is being executed. It becomes possible to do so. Thereby, it is possible to cause a situation in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means.

  Feature F4. The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number, and is less than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number plus one. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, characterized by:

  According to the feature F4, when the game turn operation is executed over the second operation period in response to the execution of the predetermined information in a situation where no other predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means, It is possible to store a predetermined number of predetermined information in the predetermined information storage means in a situation where the game operation is being executed, while in the situation where the game turning operation is being executed, It is possible to prevent more than a predetermined number of game balls from entering.

  Feature F5. When the game ball is supplied to the special pitching part in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game turning operation is repeatedly executed with the predetermined information not corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an execution trigger Until the game operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game operation for the first operation period is executed, and the game operation for the second operation period is executed in the next execution time. As described above, the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set.

  According to the feature F5, a game ball is supplied to the allocating means in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and a game turning operation is repeatedly executed with predetermined information not corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an execution trigger. In such a case, a situation occurs in which the game turning operation in the second operation period is executed once after the game turning operation in the first operation period is executed a predetermined number of times. In this way, in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the entry to the special entry portion, the operation for the game turn is performed in a configuration in which the execution efficiency of the game turn operation is increased. It is possible to periodically create a situation where the program is executed over a relatively long period of time, and it is possible to make the execution mode of the production favorable accordingly.

  Feature F6. Means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2110 in the MPU 123) is provided so that a predetermined effect is executed when the game turning operation is executed over the second operation period. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, which is characterized.

  According to the feature F6, in order to prevent a situation in which the predetermined information is not acquired despite the occurrence of the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion, the configuration for improving the execution efficiency of the game replay operation Therefore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, any one or more configurations of the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B34, the features C1 to C16, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, and the features F1 to F6 May be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the ball-entry unit provided in the game area, and the display device displays a variation of the pattern. In such a case, a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-mentioned example, it is necessary to suitably advance the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... 1st special figure winning device, 34 ... 2nd special figure winning device, 35 ... Special electric prize winning device, 36 ... Through winning prize part, 46 ... Universal map display part, 61 ... Branch entrance, 65 ... Branch Passage, 65c ... first derivation area, 65d ... second derivation area, 66a ... branch winning detection sensor, 67 ... switching piece, 71 ... first distribution mechanism, 72 ... second distribution mechanism, 107 ... payout control device, 112 ... MPU, 123 ... MPU, 134 ... second special figure reservation area, 142 ... special winning section, 151 ... guide section, 153 ... second guiding rail, 155 ... special winning section, 156 ... fourth guiding rail, 161 ... 3rd distribution mechanism, 162 ... 4th distribution mechanism, 163 ... guidance part, PA ... game field.

Claims (5)

A special entry part where game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information based on the game ball entering the special ball entry section;
Predetermined information storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means;
A game times control means for controlling the game times execution means so that the game times operation is executed in response to the grant judgment being executed by the grant judgment means;
With
The game times control means includes
In the situation where the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game turning operation, the predetermined information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information is used as an execution trigger. When the game turning operation is executed, the game turning operation is executed over a first operation period that is shorter than the shortest pitching cycle in the case where a game ball enters the special entry portion. First control means to do so;
In the case where the game rotation operation is executed in a situation where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means separately from the predetermined information that triggers the execution of the game rotation operation, Second control means for causing the game turning operation to be executed over a second operation period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein there is only one type of the first operation period.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second operation period is a period equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number.   The second operation period is a period that is equal to or longer than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number, and is less than a product of the shortest pitching period and the predetermined number plus one. The gaming machine according to claim 3.   When the game ball is supplied to the special pitching part in the shortest supply cycle in a predetermined game state, and the game turning operation is repeatedly executed with the predetermined information not corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an execution trigger Until the game operation is executed a predetermined number of times, the game operation for the first operation period is executed, and the game operation for the second operation period is executed in the next execution time. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first operation period and the second operation period are set as described above.

Images